Home

Sea Scan PC Operator`s Manual V1.8.5

1. 101 Information Earran aA Aada 102 SCAM ER 102 Display 102 ce 102 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Vi Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Annotations 103 E E E A E T E E E A E SE TEATE E RER EEE ns 3 User Parameters 1617 4712 a E E A ns nait ess en ios eeni n e 103 Setting 6 deni e siens 103 Shutdown OpNons i nn Minnie de inner re desire tenais 104 Runtime Options sise 105 Data Modification AlenS ioiai andanan aa aAa Eaa 105 Special Feature S 105 4 Display Parameters Data Direction Color Look Up Table show Color Look Up Table
2. 120 SAVE E E E 120 teres canna E EE RENE 120 Sascssceccecseincisecessancesasnenncovceveesseicancevceececdecusseasateesceccetencebisencnenssexentcveeicadenssoisexceddsceneancssceseedeeeseisevestsssey 120 Selecting a Sample Image AEO a AEA EAEra a EAEAN 120 Filter Window niscccicnisecoccczecseseetsesncoeeccaiceiceiceceucocssncesvacensenseccetesdnnssnevesssvneeteateedseiessenieodsedseseseansdeersvonsestecenieeceaers 121 Sears ee 121 Original Sample MAJE 121 Filtered Sample Image ie 121 Filt r Sel ction caiessetbvadiveivadel aasviavaadeeses ERE AETA ANE aaan 122 AGIQNS occ cence 122 Filter Sequence Recorder 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Contents VII Color Look Up Tables a a ne a eme Nes 122 Filter Operations 123 DI
3. ceessicetes seceudesteecteeserecerseaseses 132 Group Review Operation 133 Group Review Dialog 14 Pinuno Ue ep Sn See OVErVIEW seniscesceccesceissscscenesssnestcevseuesiseicaicescoucensedsenasancestecsetendshussuseeasseneaissvueivavenicbiseiteddebedeandrhesdenseeiedcsdeetsasei Print Dialog Dere A E Sea SaN PC 2 AR 135 135 Print Options Print fet seas ie eta Print Preview Dialog Selecting a Custom Print Image ci asais 136 Printing the Print Image ccssereseeneserseneencorsnteeesennseneeseceessnenseoeenscesnensenseeseceuennerseneesecesseneensetsanseeneensanensenens 137 Print Page LayOul isicisccccicccctesseiscsvcscsarsavaatcascsssceiccacaneassapeabcadeasendensonassascesenapiabeasassescuisndsacncsabadudabcuseodsnscadeausaeaes 137 File Information Header suisses 137 Print Mage 137 Current and Survey Plotters
4. 189 Organizations 190 Section 8 Contact and Support Information 192 Section 9 Revision History 194 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Section 1 e Getting Started Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 1 1 1 2 Getting Started What Is The Sea Scan PC The Sea Scan PC is a side scan sonar system The system consists of the sonar hardware and a suite of software applications that allow the operator to acquire review and process the sonar data The sonar is designed for use as a towed system however it may be adapted for use ina submersible or ROV environment How This Manual Is Organized This manual is organized in multiple sections with additional appendices Each section which is based on content consists of different chapters Each chapter discusses a different topic related to the section Section 1 Getting Started 35 This section provides an introduction to the Sea Scan PC and some basic introductory information for the new user Section 2 Equipment 5 This section describes the Sea Scan PC equipment This section is provided as a separate document that is customized for each Sea Scan PC configuration Section 3 Sonar Operation 7 This section provides important procedures and tips for the safe operation of the Sea Scan PC Section 4 Sea Scan PC Software 19 This section describes the Sea Sca
5. 106 Color Look Up Table 2 2 106 5 Opening a Data File ne ne nee dresse 109 E esse nl ra sens sms ten te 109 Preview Data 110 Data File Preview 8106 0 110 110 Opening a Data Pile 111 Re adingia Data File 112 6 Plotte neea ARR 112 1817 1121 ES ASE E E 112 Plotter Display
6. 163 Status 165 Section 7 Appendices 167 1 Sea Scan Files EEEE EEKE ERA ERARE 167 Re 167 limage Data LR raa aa Ea AEEA an aeai A 167 OVEN VICW Reese nee mentir 167 Data 168 Data File Format Header Marker Information 168 Sample Marker gt 170 Survey File 170 Overview 170 Survey File FORMAT lee 170 Header 170 Navigational and External Information 171 Data Storage Information seen 172 Sample Survey File iz saires are dns ee ns ai antenne 172 Fathometer Survey File
7. AE E E EE EEEE E E 85 Setting Express Save Settings aiaia rasiah 87 EXpresS A E N E EAA A E E 88 A EE A E E SE TEA AROE EE 88 Data Storage Settings 222 cractvececeadtessedecesecties veceetescassctvsvezecteaceoed viesevecucestesueretersdveds 88 cca sates levee ce os 88 Setting Data 88 Monitoring Data Storage 89 16 Archive FeS 91 Survey Files oe a aeo ER a a aa Epa A Padaan ae 91 OVOIVICW A E A ne EE N R E AEO 91 Creating a Survey File wx 91 Setting Survey File SOttinGS ci innii iaeiaiai desndayangisevlanadn 91 6 93 el OR En RE Re 93 VST
8. 33 Scrolling 33 ete nantes aaaea SE 33 State E 33 Scroll Bar win 33 cetvosuedevevecesserreecesesnesseussaucesdecsnduecaccecsaces sesssncusesaussuvereuedecuscesecsescusvecubested E 34 5 Operating 34 OVERVIEW eee RE svieskooseabesssteevaceestvenss 34 Power Control ne 134 34 35 Range E A EENE EN E 35 2 T 35 Setting Adah 35
9. r 147 Sea Scan PC SoftWare sicevsscsscscciseccecetessacdacecccacsessccsvsedssncesscussteevscussucvescossvatersececusoctsustdebsesascssscervsatesecetsanssseaeextes 147 147 Magnetomet r 5 8 147 Testing Communication Magnetometer 148 Magnetometer Strip Chart 149 Plotter Magnetometer Markets 2 35 easi iiie a te aA silent ANENE EEE 150 Target Identification Dialog Magnetometer Reading 150 4 Navigation 2 E A E E EEE EE AEE E E EE S 151 151 0183 2 151 TES RE 225 RP EE 151 Latitude and Longih dg it hernie aie atime 151
10. steeues cecseeessieetestcnventssieatezistneeds 74 Range Delay Dialog 75 Range Delay Slider wan 75 Range Delay rennes 75 76 Displaying niet alt ed bent 76 12 Length Measurement 77 Deere 77 Factors Affecting Length Measurement nine 77 Apparent 77 Range eee addons 77 Measuring Length 77 Aes 77 Displaying Data Length Dialog
11. 59 Zoom In by Position Button 60 ZOOM a cea Za Sassi fea MES ave Sata doce za vd adda ds Zod cas tub E 60 ZOOM E 60 2 5 60 Pixel Intensity Histogram and Color Look Up 60 62 9 Gan E 62 ner ten sig ate 62 Gain SeQUEnCe 63 Gain WIN DOW 63 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd IV Sea Scan Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Channel Orientation we 63 Color 2 20 Menu eid edd ae sente hante et t l 63 Time Gain Compensation and Signal Response Display 64 Range Based edni 64 Group Gain Co
12. 177 Compatibility Settings seen 177 Advanced Display Prope rtiOs iisicsacs sscisscsecsicecancateasecu ici che a aaa aa 178 Other Programs LOOK Weird seen 178 Short Files NAMES issicciseiccsescssssieanctvcucessaicarceddectecsecanacadarcesseceavendsbissanseroneteabedisehvadendenidexceddecensancdsccndavseseoisedesisayen 178 Limited Directory Depth 179 Data CONC CUION ci cnissieccezccnesessestcectereasesisencecensocredenevadencensesdcesensetiscesessestieeieancsisesebseeisoidedtesedeandaterstensesteiceiescsaees 179 3 Quick Button Reference ccccessscceeeseeeeeeenseeeeeeensnaeeeenseaeeeeensaeeeensneeeeseseeeeeeseseeeeeensneeeenes 179 Sea Scan PC TASK E EA E E E E E E A E A 180 2 RSR RE E E E AT E E E 181 4 Setting the Time Zone saiisine ek eink een ell lee nn ins 181 WINDOWS 98 cases stuseseucesetascuesezzessszessse0s E E E E E E souedsstasuesssdecssauscsesestezesscoceaess 181 8 2 182 0 A E E E 183 D Test IPROCCOUNCS aeeie aa aa aaea aaan Ea pa pArA aa aaiae eaaa EEEa 183 TO
13. sevscesaguck encens nt einen E n te 26 921 tendres ass sen ae este ie 26 Overview 26 Setting User Settings j cinissevessssniascevctscescevseacesunccectncsecesieccesencetiersrcvsunnsnncsvsbtesiveicaicsddecsensecusdeetandencendaccedsodsvcnereaenes 27 Startup and Shutdown Options sise 27 Automatic tienne 28 28 4 Display Parameters 2 22 1 ede eels deeds 29 A ETENE OE EEEE A RE ER SR REP 29 GOlO eeadeadeveivasevsscicadeesvevedscecendetysdecsucbisncesuadecubessceseencecsacexs sey anseusseeseceblacesined 29 29 Selecting the 29 Inverting the Color 6 SEEEN aa E EA E 30 Cycling Color Scales 4272800 man oia epia osaient 30 Setting Custom Color Scale sca mean 31
14. 173 aaa ees 173 Fathometer Survey File Format sise 173 Header anti adassineanataniiel lass E 173 Fathometer Depth Information ss 173 Sample Fathometer Survey 174 Magnetometer Survey File 174 EEE EE A 174 Magnetometer Survey File Format ses 174 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd X Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Header 175 Magnetometer Readings Information 175 Sample Magnetometer Survey Fileics sccsscvsesictytecessssiviesveseetessetsi 175 Auto GIF Information Log File 1 dd dessin 176 OVEN VIGW 176 Auto GIF Information Log File Format 176 Sample Auto GIF Information Log File sise 176 2 Running Sea Scan and Sea Scan Review in Windows XP 176 5 16 176 Windows 16 Bit Emulation Problems sienne 177 256
15. tee ees a ee eae 39 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Contents Setting Boundary Coordinates 39 40 41 200 41 ZOOMPOUt EE EET 42 42 Cycle 42 Display Paramete Fee eee eee 42 Draw Swath 43 DAW INOS 43 Draw Depth 43 5 43 Draw Shoreline ksin eaaa a EASA AAE A EET 44 Draw 44 Markers and 44 eh entame ann an en etant
16. siennes 137 Marker 138 Section 6 External Devices 140 T 140 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Vil Vill Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Monitoring External Devices 140 Display External Input Output Status Dialog 140 Communications Port Settings Display een 140 Setting Communications Port Settings 1 141 Common Equipment Connector 2 ss 141 2 ionale nn area nana 141 OVErvieW a 141 Water Depth Information senn a a O pE T a E AE Eea eS d Ea 142 NMEA 01 83 aAa a anana ASAE SEAS EnaA 142 Proprietary Serial Sentences seen 142 2670 1553 143 Water Depth 143
17. 128 ae 129 Area qed GE deed eg ba 129 Area tis 129 11 Object Height 131 Annotations TE PE DR 131 12 Saving Data en en en a 131 OVErvieW eivcssecsssccescctsaseavezcdscduesaneesctoeapecsectecanerecsensctacacencnvesvascesssuensbacsecervatessuctveneedseisvdencsssensencdncenvsuseersuersseinaues 131 Data Storage Paramelers 52 5 6 131 Saving as Sea Scan PC Data 2 132 Saving AS 132 13 Group ReVIQW 132 132 Datta File
18. 5 10 3 2 Display Area Dialog elect the Area check box in the Sea Scan tool bar to Data Area display the Area dialog The Area check box in the Sea maaa Scan tool bar will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white An Area dialog appears that is used to display the area and select the area measurement Figure 5 22 Area tools If necessary move the dialog so the feature you Measurement Dialog would like to measure is completely visible The dialog consists of two sections the Area Tool bar across the top and the area display section 5 10 3 3 Area Display 5 10 3 4 The area display section displays the area of the selected objects in the selected units of length The latest measurement remains displayed until the Area dialog is removed or another area measurement is made This section is also used to display action messages to keep you informed on the progress of any lengthy area calculations Area Tool Bar Area Measurement Tools tracing the outline in the sonar image with the cursor When this tool is selected a base outlined region is created This is the starting point for all area measurements since all the other area tools only allow you to modify the base outlined region by either adding or removing regions 94 The Area button in Area tool bar allows you to measure the area of a feature by Select the Area button in the Area tool bar Place the cursor along the edg
19. 113 Edit Target Identification Window 113 Clean TRACK GP RER ee EE 114 E A E 115 115 Marker 115 Monitoring Marker ee ead ee 116 Monitoring Marker Transfer Information 116 5 2225 Aaaa 117 Read Marker Fie ireren A a EE Eaa 117 7 00 118 Quick Zoom Selection Operation eensnennsenn ceed astien iiinis 118 ZOOM Settings 118 GIF ee ae 119 18 12 119 119 GColor Look Up
20. 44 Selecting amp Marker or 45 delaras 45 5 a NAGS 47 Marker and 48 Waypoint esnin gine nae 49 Waypoint avai en less ten reg en eu een 50 Marker and Waypoint 22 51 Marker and Waypoint Save srl ener 51 Marker and Waypoint 52 Measure 52 Measure Area wor 5S Clear Track 53 Import Survey lt
21. STARTDATA DataPathname C SSPCDATA 02SEP 02SEP000 mst Version 1 BeginSysTime 10196848 EndSysTime 10438157 STOPDATA STARTNAV10438634 98245 1523 19980902 1523 0 00 032 N 0 00 032 E 45 0 3 2 Both 100 600 0 00 0 23 25 STOPNAVEOF Fathometer Survey File Overview By default the fathometer survey file uses the dpt extension Although these are simple ASCII text files and would normally use the file name extension the use of this specific extension facilitates the search of Sea Scan PC fathometer survey files A fathometer survey file is created automatically each time the Sea Scan PC application is started if the fathometer survey file feature is enabled All of the subsequent depth information from the fathometer is written to the file As a result you will be able to completely recreate the water depth based on the stored information Fathometer Survey File Format The fathometer survey file a simple ASCII text file is a continuous log of all the incoming fathometer information The fathometer depth file contains two distinct sections the Header and the Fathometer Depth Information 7 1 5 2 1 Header The optional header helps the Sea Scan PC identify the data file as a valid fathometer survey file The exact string SeaScanPC FathometerFile must be present as the first line of the file The version is then listed The year 2000 compliant date time and computer system date time are written followed b
22. a ein nee iv eta 21 External Mende nn 24 24 information WindoW 25 Scan Tool Bar 25 Operating Parameters 25 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Il Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Display Parameters aw 25 terne ohne landes dean mnt nee tit 25 reer ere 26 GAIN EEA tia desde de ee Aie te TE acest ena ens 26 Annotations S 26 Data WINDOW
23. 6 4 3 3 6 5 6 5 1 the external source Although other input sentences may be available only the sentences that the Sea Scan PC is interested in are listed The NMEA 0183 sentences RMA RMC GGA GLL VTG HDT and ZDA are listed The entire sentence strings minus the Start of Sentence and Talker ID characters are written to this group For MIL STD 1553 transmissions the raw data words are written in a waterfall display This allows you to check the validity of the sentence contents without the Sea Scan PC having to attempt to interpret the contents Log Select the Log button to record the incoming transmissions from the external device for debugging and analysis in a communications log file You will be prompted by the Select Communications Log File dialog to set a filename preferably with the c f extension and a destination directory for the communications log file Upon selection of a valid filename and location the Sea Scan PC will place some header information in the file and then all subsequent incoming transmissions from the external device The raw information will be logged until you close the Serial Communications Test dialog and return to normal operations This communications log file is very useful for debugging difficulties with external devices Training Mode Simulated Data In training mode the Sea Scan PC software simulates the serial transmissions from the external GPS The latitude and longitude L L
24. Print Image The section of the print image that is being printed on each page is centered on the page The 1 1 aspect ratio of the sonar image is maintained thus the far right side of the page is not used As stated above the icons on the far right side of the file information header provide the relative position of the print image and the section of the print image that is printed on each specific page Current and Survey Plotters The images of the current and survey plotters are printed on a single page Both of the plotters are enclosed in a separate rectangle on the printed page The two plotters are identified as either the current or survey plotter in the title bar of the enclosing rectangle 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 138 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 14 6 4 Marker List A list of the current markers and waypoints are printed on a single page The marker list is separated by marker type The waypoints are listed first followed by the estimated markers and then the nadir markers Please refer to 4 7 5 1 Markers and Waypoints Overview p 4 24 for more details about the different types of markers The identifier string latitude and longitude of each of the markers are listed in double column format 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Section 6 e External Devices 140 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 6 External Devices 6 1 O
25. 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 152 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 6 4 2 4 6 4 2 5 In the Sea Scan PC software when the L L pair is available from 00 00 221N 000 00 224 the external source the position is displayed in the information window The position is also displayed in the information window of the Sea Scan plotter It is possible that an invalid L L pair is read or the L L pair is not available for an extended time more than 10 seconds An invalid or nonexistent L L pair is indicated by writing dashes in place of the position information If the L L pair is not available after an extended time a time out message is displayed In NMEA 0183 mode the message No NMEA Lat Long Data or No NMEA Nav Data depending on the state of the other navigation information is displayed In MIL STD 1553 mode the message No 1553 Nav Data is displayed The new valid position is displayed when the next valid L L pair is received by the Sea Scan PC Speed Over Ground speed over ground SOG is provided by the NMEA 0183 RMA RMC VTG sentences and the MIL STD 1553 transmission In the Sea Scan PC software the SOG from the external source is used to set the ping rate of the transducers automatically This maintains a constant 1 1 aspect ratio for the sonar image data automatically Please refer to Speed Control 37 for more information In the Sea Scan PC software wh
26. 4 5 2 2 Turning Power Turn the power off and stop the data collection process by selecting the Power button in the Sea Scan tool bar again The Power button will appear raised Power will no longer be supplied to the transducers and they will no longer ping 4 5 3 Range 4 5 31 Overview The Range Settings group in the Sea Scan tool bar consists of the current range and left and right arrows to decrement and increment the 150 range The range is the distance from the transducer that the Sea Scan PC will display for both channels Thus when the range is set to 50 meters the Sea Scan PC is set to look 50 meters on either side of the two transducers Depending on the operating requirements you may want to set the Sea Scan PC to different ranges The shorter ranges allow very high resolution imaging at close ranges with a high frequency transducer The long ranges may be used with the 150 kHz sonar transducer to cover large areas while in a search pattern If a range delay has been set then RD will appear after the range in the Range Settings group This provides a quick reference for you to see if a range delay is in use See Range Delay 741 for more information on the use of range delay 4 5 3 2 Setting Range Increment the selected range by pressing the right arrow button in the Range Settings group in the Sea Scan tool bar For example the range will be increased from 75 to 100 meters when the right arrow button is
27. 03 003 Num Records 0 Figure 4 52 Survey File Status Box Survey File This section displays the storage information for the main survey file The abbreviated pathname to the survey file is listed Furthermore the numbers of navigational records and data files that have been recorded in the current survey file are also listed Fathometer File This section displays the storage information for the fathometer survey file The abbreviated pathname to the fathometer survey file is listed Furthermore the numbers of fathometer readings that have been recorded in the current file are also listed Magnetometer File This section displays the storage information for the magnetometer survey file The abbreviated pathname to the magnetometer survey file is listed Furthermore the numbers of magnetometer readings that have been recorded in the current file are also listed 4 16 2 Marker File 4 16 2 1 Overview The marker file is a simple ASCII text file that contains a continuous log of all the markers and waypoints that are created during a survey By default the marker file uses the mkr extension The format of the marker file is described in detail Marker Waypoint Data File 165 4 16 2 2 Creating Marker File A marker file is created automatically each time the Sea Scan PC application is started All of the marker and waypoint information is written to the marker file As result you will have a complete list
28. 4 The current identifier string is displayed for reference and also in the New Identifier String text box Enter a new identifier string The string may be up to 31 characters without any spaces 5 Save the new identifier string for the selected marker or waypoint by clicking the OK button or hitting Return The new identifier string is assigned to the selected marker or waypoint the status window is cleared of the Rename marker message and you are returned to the Sea Scan plotter Cancel the new identifier string by clicking the Cancel button The new identifier string is not recorded the status window is cleared of the Rename marker message and you are returned to the Sea Scan plotter 4 7 5 6 Waypoint Add Ej Waypoints may be placed on the Sea Scan plotter graphically to mark a location These waypoints are useful to identify predefined sites and survey routes 1 Select the Waypoint Add button in the plotter tool bar The cursor will change to the waypoint add cursor and Add waypoint will appear in the status window Ge 2 Center the cursor over the desired location then press and release the left mouse button 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 50 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 3 A waypoint is placed at the selected location and the cursor is changed back to the normal arrow cursor The new number of waypoints is displayed in the status window and the rest of the
29. 42 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 7 3 4 4 7 3 5 4 7 3 6 4 7 4 4 The selected section is displayed in the display window at the new magnification factor and the status window is cleared of the Zoom message Zoom Out Select the Zoom Out button in the plotter tool bar to zoom out the active plotter The plotter extents are increased in all directions automatically by a factor of two Thus the current plotter is centered in the new plotter boundary coordinates Pan Select the Pan button in the plotter tool bar to pan the active plotter In this case the 2 plotter dimensions are changed however the plotter may be shifted in any direction 1 Select the Pan button in the plotter tool bar to select a new center for the active plotter The cursor will change to the plotter pan cursor and Pan will appear the status window 2 Center the plotter pan cursor over the section you would like to set as the new center of the active plotter Then press and release the left mouse button without moving the cursor The active plotter boundary coordinates are reset to center the selected area without changing the plotter dimensions 3 The selected section is displayed in the display window and the status window is cleared of the Pan message Cycle Back in or out and panning the previous boundary coordinates are recorded The latest ten boundary coordinates are re
30. 55 bles 36 AE T E danse saree 36 Setting Channel a aa p E i aR E E hain 36 FREQUENCY N E EEEE E E E A T E EN E EEA E beats 36 OVEMIEW islean a dais 36 Setting Frequency 36 EEEE E E E EO EE EAE 37 sas 227 Automatic Speed Control sre sorana eme inner ler sua balade 37 Manual Sp ed Gontrol 222ue8 nan rm a wane rates enter 37 6 External Devices 51215 sens E OVERVIEW E E E EE EE RS 38 Plotter Layout silisto aerea cectcesuececsetccaetecsendcestceceesaezees 38 Plotter Display anti aetna 38 5 5 39 Plotter Status Witdoweeis rises as sement teed aN Sea a a aeaaea assise en aies 39 Plotter Tool Bahnen
31. Multiple Calculations 14 EAD eara OREO 82 0 021 071 12 ARE EE ER ne 82 Adding Annotation issiccsccccssssecscesenseecnissccencnccncsvinceasasseseereataesubcencabdsbessvanecaneinatereubesadsadubosssanscsuabucbasseatendeadeasesse 83 tele 83 Display Add Annotation Dialogue 83 83 Comment Shortcut Buttons 83 Editing and Removing Annotation 84 OVETVIEW ER 84 Display Edit Annotation Dialogin anea 84 Displaying Annotation Symbols 2 1 couestarsneccagsngetareuesecnentactucheseneeeneaoeees 84 Customize Annotation Shortcuts 85 COVEN E AEE AEE cecum ey nt de dense er tete 85 Setting Active Identifier 2 85 CUSTOM OK E 85 15 Saving na elite dede danse ie 85
32. 1 Select the Filter check box the Sea Scan tool bar to select section of the sonar image to filter The check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white The cursor will change to the filter selection cursor 2 To select a 256 x 256 pixel section as the sample image center the cursor over the section you would like use Then press and release the left mouse button without moving the cursor The selected section of the sonar image will be displayed in the filter window The selected section may not extend past the physical edges of the sonar record In this case when selecting an object at the edge of the sonar image the selection edge is set to the physical edge and the selected center of the image is off center in the Filter window If you have already selected a sample image and the filter window is visible you may select a new sample image without having to explicitly close the filter window Select the Reselect button to select new sample image The filter window is automatically removed and the cursor will change to the filter selection cursor Repeat instruction 2 from above to select a new sample image Filter Window Overview The filter window allows you to try different filters on the sample image The final filter sequence can be recorded Original eres and then applied generally to the entire image The filter window consists of six sections the Original Sample Image
33. 7 5 1 3 Using the Portable Test Unit Each Sea Scan PC system sold includes a Portable Test Unit for testing the tow cable pigtail and sonar system card power output Below are instructions on how to use this unit for troubleshooting purposes Test 1 Tow Cable Verification 1 Connect Test Unit to tow cable dry end 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 186 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 7 5 1 4 Note Tow cable must not be connected to a towfish 2 Press Test Button and note LEDs on test unit If any Red LED is energized one of the Coaxial elements in the tow cable is shorted Note The left channel which also provides electrical power must be OK for any operation of the towfish If the right channel is shorted operations can continue on the left channel only For single frequency towfish only the first two coaxial elements Right and Left channels are required The third coaxial element E and F is only required with dual frequency towfish Test 2 Confirm 28 VDC Output from Sonar 1 Connect Test unit to end of sonar interconnecting cable pigtail The tow cable may or may be connected to the test unit 2 on Computer and start the Sea Scan PC program 3 Select Power On in the Sea Scan PC program If the Green LED is energized on the Test Unit the sonar system is providing the correct power to the tow cable If the Green LED is not energized test the sonar outp
34. Figure 4 32 Layback The Layback dialog allows you to set both the lateral and axial layback The lateral layback indicates the offset distance from the position indicated by the external navigation device to the towfish to the port and starboard of the survey vessel The lateral layback is useful if a long boom to the side of the survey vessel supports the towfish The axial layback indicates the offset distance from the position indicated by the external navigation device to the towfish to the stern or forward The current layback is displayed in the Sea Scan tool bar directly below the way button The total surface layback a combination of both lateral and axial layback is displayed If the layback is enabled then two asterisks will appear 30 after the layback in the Sea Scan tool bar Otherwise if the layback is not enabled the layback appears by itself NOTE When the layback is enabled the calculated position of a target and the swath coverage displayed in the plotter are corrected automatically 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 72 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 10 2 Estimating Layback For shallow water operations in which there is a short distance to estimate it is fairly simple to determine an accurate towfish layback from the antenna of the external navigation device In shallow water operations the towfish is typically close to the survey
35. Internal DAC 32 Radeon VE yation BK5 0 0 VR000 000 005 018 002 001 000 000 y List All Modes 6 Choose the video mode that is most similar to the current one you are using with a 256 color 7 Click the OK button on the Mode List window 8 Click the OK button on the Advanced Display Properties window As soon as you click OK Windows will switch your display mode A dialog window will now pop up and ask you if you would like to keep the settings Click the Yes button 9 Click the OK button in the Display Properties window Windows is now in 256 color mode List All Modes List of valid modes 800 by 600 High Color 16 bit 60 Hertz olor 68 High Color 1 1024 by 768 True Color 32 bit 60 Hertz M Other Programs Look Weird While Windows is running in 256 color mode all of the applications that are currently running have to share the 256 colors This may cause other applications such as web browsers and applications that were meant to use more than 256 colors to look weird This is a visual affect only and does not adversely affect the operation of the application Short Files Names Win16 programs are restricted to using file names of 8 main characters and a 3 letter file extension Characters such as spaces cannot be used in a Win16 filename Win32 programs has around 255 characters available for their file names and can use special characters such as spaces in the name Besides file
36. where 222 is a required three character string with the name of the current time zone Jdfd is a required field with an optionally signed number of one or two digits specifying the local time zone s difference from GMT in hours and is an optional three character field with the name of the local time zone during daylight savings time For example the following command sets the time zone to Pacific Time Variable Name TZ Variable Value PST8PDT or for Greenwich Mean Time Variable Name TZ Variable Value GMTO 7 Click OK 8 Click the other OK button 9 You may have to restart the computer for the time zone variable to take affect 7 5 Test Procedures This section contains test procedures for Sea Scan PC side scan sonar equipment 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 184 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 7 5 1 Tow Cable 7 5 1 1 Cable Pinouts Dry End Wet End Left channel data and power to towfish 28 VDC Left channel return Right channel data BLACK Right channel return High Low frequency control power 5 VDC WHITE F Control power return 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Appendices 185 7 5 1 2 Pigtail Pinouts Pigtail Cable Side Splashproof Pigtail Computer BLACK WHITE Side ict carmel aa ara power io omien 2000 fronts OO
37. 4 2 4 Information Window The information window is located directly below the menu bar It displays the navigational information such as the latitude and longitude speed over ground and course over ground when it is available The active color scale is also displayed in the information window 4 2 5 Sea Scan Tool Bar The Sea Scan tool bar is located along the left side of the screen below the menu bar The Sea Scan tool bar consists of a set of controls that allow you to instantly and easily change any of the operating and display settings The controls in the Sea Scan tool bar also provide a visual cue of the current settings The controls are divided into functional groups Operating Parameters Display Parameters File Management Modules Annotations and finally Gain 4 2 5 1 Operating Parameters This group of controls allows you to change the essential operating parameters of the Sea Scan PC data collection such as power mode range channel and frequency mode layback and the manual speed settings These operating parameters are described in detail in 4 5 Operating Parameters p 4 14 4 2 5 2 Display Parameters This group of controls allows you to change the display parameters of Brown the sonar image data in the data window such as color scale These Fi display parameters are described in detail in Display Parameters 2 4 2 5 3 Express Save The express save control allows you to express save a
38. 7 1 3 2 2 Marker Information Line Each subsequent line in the data file contains a complete set of marker information The marker information fields are separated by commas and each line is delimited at the end by the character Each set of marker information consists of Type Identifier Timestamp Julian Date Julian Time This value may be either 1 Waypoint marker Green Cross 2 Nadir marker Purple Square 4 Estimated marker Red Square 8 Magnetometer marker Red square and black M This field contains the unique identifier for the marker This identifier is assigned at the time the marker is created and may be changed by the reader This field contains the timestamp for the sonar data line that is associated with the marker If the marker does not have an associated sonar data line this field is blank to indicate the system time as invalid This field contains the Julian date for the sonar data line that is associated with the marker If the marker does not have an associated sonar data line this field is blank to indicate the date as invalid This field contains the Julian time for the marker This is the number of seconds since midnight of the sonar data line that is associated with the marker If the marker does not have an associated sonar data line this field is blank to indicate the time as invalid Target Latitude and Longitude These fields contain the latitude and longitude L L of the target Tar
39. Each subsequent line in the magnetometer survey file contains a complete set of timestamp position and magnetometer reading Commas or tabs as selected by the operator in the Survey File Options dialog separate the information fields Each line is delimited at the end by the character Each line of information may consist of System Timestamp This required field contains the timestamp for the navigational information record The timestamp is the number of milliseconds elapsed since Windows was started Julian Date Time This field contains the Julian date and time for the navigational information record Y2K compliant Date Time This field contains the year 200 compliant date and time for the magnetometer record Position These required fields contain the latitude and longitude L L of the survey vessel for the magnetometer record The latitude and longitude are written in a standard format as degrees and decimal minutes followed by an ASCII character designating the hemisphere There is comma between the degrees and decimal minutes For the hemisphere N S E and W represent north south east and west respectively Reading This field indicates the magnetic field reading in gammas from the magnetometer A blank indicates an invalid value 7 1 6 3 Sample Magnetometer Survey File The following is an example of a valid magnetometer survey file SeaScanPC MagnetometerFile Version 3 Y2KDate 20001201 Y2KTime 43205 Date Fr
40. Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Marine Sonic Technology Ltd White Marsh VA This product was designed and developed by a team of engineers at Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd All Rights Reserved Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 5508 George Washington Memorial Highway P O Box 730 White Marsh VA 23183 0730 804 693 9602 800 447 4804 Technical Support For technical support call 800 447 4804 or visit our web site at http www marinesonic com Copyright This manual and the software described in it are copyrighted with all rights reserved Under the copyright laws neither this manual nor the software may be copied in whole or in part without the written consent of Marine Sonic Technology Ltd except in the normal use of the software or to make backup copies This exception does not allow copies to be made for others Limitations on Warranty amp Liability Marine Sonic Technology Ltd warrants that the disk s on which this software is recorded is free from defects in materials and workmanship under normal use for 90 ninety days after the date of original purchase Please refer to this product s Warranty for further information concerning the limitations on warranty and liability of this product and its associated software Trademarks Sea Scan is a registered trademark of Marine Sonic Technology Ltd SHARPS 15 a tra
41. selected at any time If the fathometer is Off the Sea Scan PC will not process any incoming transmissions from the fathometer In other words even if the external device transmits a valid input sentence the sentence contents will not be processed unless the fathometer has been enabled The sentence inputs are described in Water Depth 42 If any of these modes is selected the fathometer is considered to be enabled The Sea Scan PC polls the incoming sentences looking for the current water depth information Communication Port The Communication Port section displays the current serial port settings for the fathometer input Ifa serial fathometer input is enabled select the Comm button to change the serial port settings The NMEA 0183 Standard for Interfacing Marine Electronic Navigational Devices version 2 1 which was adopted by the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA on October 15 1995 recommends serial port parameters of 4800 8 1 for data transmission 6 2 3 3 Testing Communication Fathometer Overview You may test the communications of the external fathometer device by selecting the Fathometer Test Communications menu item from the External menu This menu command displays a dialog that displays the serial port settings and checks the availability composition and integrity of the serial transmissions The dialog consists of a single nout section and the Figure 6 6 Communicat
42. 4 8 3 8 Length Button 4 9 4 9 1 You can measure the length of any object in the zoom window using the cursor This is the preferable situation to accurately measure smaller features since you can place the cursor more precisely at the beginning and end of the feature A Zoom Length dialog is used to display the transverse axial and total lengths This length measurement process is identical to the process used to Lengi measure length in the data window Note that the Zoom Length dialog can only measure features in the zoom window and the Data Length Trans 3 37 dialog can only measure features the data window You measure Tota 4 76 m features in both windows in the exact same way Please refer to Length Figure 4 22 Zoom Measurement 7 for more details on the length measurement process Length Dialog Gain Overview The Sea Scan PC transducers produce a very specifically defined View of Soner Signal acoustic signal The acoustic signal may be thought of as a fan of sound reaching out from the transducer source Viewed from above the signal is very narrow and viewed from the side the signal is wide This shape of acoustic sound allows the transducer to look at a very narrow Side View of Sonar Signal section perpendicular to its path of motion As the out going acoustic signal travels through the water the signal strength at the wave front weakens by a variety of influences such as absorption b
43. General Support Connection status time IP Address entry box Click the Close button in the 9 Ades Type Misna Ces Local Area Network Connection Status window when Cae IP Address 192 168 69 91 finished Subnet Mask 255 255 255 0 Default Gateway 192 168 69 1 The Port entry box needs to be filled out with the number of the port that the receiving application will be listening on For Sonar Wiz MAP the port number is typically 6500 For other applications please refer to their product documentation for the Port number The next step in setting up a real time connection is choosing the correct interface type For Sonar Wiz MAP please choose the Sonar Wiz MAP option For all other applications please choose the Sonar Data Stream option Finally start the application on the receiving computer and click the Connect button in the Real Time Settings window The status of the connection will be displayed to the right of the Connect button If the receiving application is running and the Connection settings were filled out correctly the status should now read Connected You may now click the OK button to keep the changes you have made or click the Cancel button to throw away the changes you have made to the settings 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 6 8 3 Status The real time interface in addition to having a Settings window also has a Status window This window displays the current status of the real time
44. Range m 100 Range Markers m OFF Automatic Save 0 Resolution 1000x512 Annotations User Options Survey File Output Plotter New DOWN Brown SAME MODIFIED 4 3 SAME SAME 300 MODIFIED Altitude 0 0m 0 20 BOTH OFF OFF 0 1000 x 512 SAME MODIFIED SAME SAME Do you want to save the NEW DEFAULT SETTINGS 6 Figure 4 5 Save Settings Dialog 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 28 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 3 2 2 4 3 2 3 Automatic Options Respond Automatically to Dialog Prompts When this option is enabled the user is never presented with a dialog The dialogs are never displayed and the default response is automatically selected All dialog operations are logged to a file named sspcmsg txt in the default data directory If the ssocmsg txt file already exists any new dialog events are appended at the end of the file This option is not recommended for normal operations however it is essential for use in the Host Remote mode Runtime Options Prompt and record transducer frequency If this option is enabled you will be prompted to select the transducer frequencies when you turn the power on This information is for data collection and review purposes only and does not affect the actual frequency of the transducers If this option is disabled the transducer frequency will be recorded as Unknown See Power Con
45. Select the Automatic Gain button in the Group Gain Action section of the gain window to initiate the automatic gain process Alternatively select the Automatic Gain button in the Sea Scan tool bar The automatic gain process is only applied to the channels that are selected The automatic gain process sets the gain settings automatically to optimal settings for the current operating environment The automatic gain settings may be adjusted in the Automatic Gain Settings dialog Furthermore the automatic gain process may be monitored in the AutoGain Status dialog Automatic Gain Process The automatic gain process attempts to adjust the amount of gain at each selectable range in the active range until it has determined that the gain settings are at optimal levels according to the current automatic gain settings It does this by looking at the intensity of the background in the active range The process attempts to adjust the gain settings such that there is a constant background level throughout the entire active range This may or may not be possible for this particular automatic gain process depending on the current operating environment The automatic gain process samples the current sonar record line Firstly it determines the intensity of the background in the active range It then determines the required gain adjustment change the background level to an optimal level The gain is then adjusted The gain slider controls in the Range Bas
46. Speed Over Ground 152 Course Over Ground 152 Time aaa sentent ace deena attirant 153 Heading eatiauaciiivid oni Ne ent ini 153 TIME 153 Sea Scan Software 153 153 154 Testing Communication Navigation sn 155 Training Mode Simulated 156 D Event MarK f s nn E E 156 easisnceecescescecsnsescenessasnritcnvsetesisevcaicercencensevsesteleedsatecdesenebiseusesnaaetentesveeseaveedcoideddeddebedeandsevesdeasestedcedescsasin 156 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Contents IX Event Trigger Sentence 157 Standard Event Trigger Sentence 157 Numbered Event 157 Scan Somtwalre aise A E E N EAA EE 157 E E E EE E 157 Event Marker SetiNgS sssrinin aeaeaie
47. The other Laplacian filter operations are variations on this approximation Although the Laplacian edge enhancement technique is omnidirectional the filter operation selectively emphasizes lines in the horizontal vertical and diagonal directions if so directed Embossing These filters have an interesting visual effect on the image The resulting image appears embossed by adding lighting and shadowing to the images along the edges The direction for the filter operation specifies the direction along which the edges are lighted and shadowed to create the embossing effect Statistical Nonlinear Edge Detection The Prewitt and Sobel edge detection operations are highly reliable omnidirectional edge detection algorithms Although they generate better results these two operations are computationally complex and require a longer time than the other edge detection operations A faster implementation of Sobel s edge detection algorithm Sobel Fast is provided Although faster it is not as reliable an omnidirectional edge detection operation as the slower Sobel operation Statistical Nonlinear Selection These filters sort the pixels from the surrounding neighborhood in ascending order The pixel of interest the pixel in the middle of the neighborhood is replaced by a pixel selected from the sorted list of pixels The Minimal operation replaces the pixel of interest with the minimum pixel intensity from the sorted list The Median operation repl
48. can also toggle the display of the Marker Information dialog The marker handling process is described in detail in Marker Lists 1151 Status 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 100 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Annotations Show This command displays a pop up menu of annotation commands This pop up menu allows you to toggle the display of the annotations add new annotations edit existing ress annotations and customize the annotation Comment Shortcut buttons The annotation process is described in detail in Annotations 82 Range Marker v Of Range markers are also called scale lines since they are scale 10m reference lines displayed in the sonar image This command 20m displays a list of possible ranges for the range markers The 50 m current range marker setting is indicated with a check mark Range markers are placed over the sonar image at the designated interval to provide a quick visual cue for range from the towfish For example if you have selected 20 meters as the range interval the range markers will be placed over both channels of the sonar image data every 20 meters They are displayed in an intermittent format The range markers are displayed for 30 lines and then skipped for 50 lines The intermittent display results in a vertical dashed line marking the selected range interval 100 m Settings Data Storage This command displays a pop up menu
49. lt 54 Draw to Survey Plotter 54 Active Plotter Selection 1 i aagana i ansete apa dao ra aa AC eaey 54 Plotter Sonar Image Interaction 55 OVGIVIOW E E 55 55 Marking a Feature Standard Methods 55 wearer 56 58 Hier een tre ne en en ne a a 58 Selecting a Zoom Section 58 200 WOW ER encuccesubsaaeesav sacs sop susrecuseuesuiscaudeussdgspacsanadat dues ruses 59 VIS Ws A 59 ZOOM 59 ZOOM AGAIN
50. s current position to the selected marker are displayed in the Rng Bearing dialog The Rng Bearing dialog floats on top of the Sea Scan plotter and the data window It can be moved anywhere on the screen and remains visible even if the Sea Scan plotter is hidden 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 46 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Selecting a Range Bearing Marker 1 Select the Range Bearing Marker check box in the plotter tool bar The cursor will change to the range bearing marker selection cursor and the message Select R B marker will appear in the status window 2 Place the cursor close to the desired marker or waypoint then press and release the left mouse button Select RIB marker 3 The closest marker or waypoint is selected as the range bearing marker A dark blue box is drawn around the selected marker If there are many markers and waypoints close together you may want to zoom in on the group in order to select the correct marker or waypoint without any problems The Ang Bearing dialog is displayed the status window is cleared of the Select R B marker message and you are returned to the Sea Scan plotter The Range Bearing Marker check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white indicating that a marker has been selected for range bearing navigation information Range Bearing Dialog Layout Apart from the caption bar the Rng Bearing dialog consist
51. the date and time the data file was originally stored and the file version are displayed Currently the scale feature is not available The scale is intended to display the conversion from the units used to print the image to the real world units to the units 5 14 2 3 1 Print Options This section allows you to customize the print options Using the scaling radio buttons you can size the printed image To select an option place the cursor on the corresponding radio button then press and release the left mouse button The selected radio button will now appear marked and the previously selected radio button will be cleared Only one radio button may be selected at any time With the magnification percentage set at 100 the image buffer will fill one page In order to maintain aspect ratio the entire width of the printed page is not used By selecting 50 the print image will be drawn at one half the size By selecting 200 the print image will be drawn at twice the size In this case unless you have selected a smaller custom print image you will likely require multiple pages to print the entire print image By selecting the Fit to Page button the selected print image will be printed page You may set the magnification percentage to any value by selecting the Custom button 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 136 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 In addition to the print image
52. the speed over ground SOG and the course over ground COG are updated every second The ship starts at the intersection of the equator and the prime meridian 0 9 00 00 0 00 00E It then travels northeast along a straight lane with a course of 45 The ship then executes a 180 turn to the right and continues southwest along an adjacent lane The ship then executes another 180 turn but to the left and continues northeast along an adjacent lane It will continue this northeast then southwest lane pattern indefinitely The simulated speed will speed up in the turns to mimic the proper turning procedure The L L is extrapolated from the previous L L based on the speed and the COG Thus if you chose to ignore the simulated SOG and set the apparent SOG manually the ship will appear to move faster In other words the L L responds to the value of the apparent SOG as set by either the simulated SOG or manually by you The simulated navigational information is not meant to represent a true ship s track but merely to supply simulated L L SOG and COG Event Marker Overview software An event marker indicates a specific sonar data line within the sonar image Event markers are an extension of the annotation feature in the Sea Scan PC software You can edit and delete event markers in the exact same manner as the standard annotations in the sonar image See Annotations s for more information about annotations The event marker alternatin
53. 0 63 display data The default color look up table is a straight ramp that maps the 8 bit intensity data to the 6 bit operations will o display data as a linear function Similar to the filter operations the color look up table nly apply to the active sonar image The look up table parameters are reset whenever a new data file is opened 5 4 2 1 Show Color Lo ok Up Table Window The color look up table window allows you to set the color look up table for the entire image Select the LUT button appear pressed 5 4 2 2 Color Look Up in the Sea Scan tool bar to show the color look up table window The check box will down and backlight with the color white Table Window sean EE EDR CORRE HET The color look up table window displays two histograms the look up 8 bit Data pan table and the look up table action buttons LUT 8 bit Data to 6 bit Image EME 27 Figure 5 9 Color Look Up Table Window 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 107 8 bit Sonar Data Histogram The 8 bit data histogram displays the intensities of the 8 bit sonar data The relative height of each histogram bar represents the number of data bins in the sonar image with the intensity related to the histogram bar position The left most histogram bar represents the number of data bins with an intensity of O no acoustic return The right most histogram bar represents the nu
54. 6 External Devices The external devices are described in detail in a separate section of the manual For more information on the external device please refer to External Devices 1407 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 38 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 7 4 7 1 4 7 2 4 7 2 1 Plotter Overview Plotter This chapter describes the features of the integrated Sea Scan plotter If the Sea Scan PC is receiving navigational information from an external source the vessel s latitude and longitude position L L are plotted on the current and survey plotters The Sea Scan plotter can plot the vessel s position worldwide If the vessel s heading or course over ground COG is also available the estimated swath coverage of the sonar beam may also be plotted with the vessel s track Position markers may be set in the plotters to mark navigation waypoints seafloor features or survey routes The Sea Scan plotter is a separate module that works in the background continuously logging and plotting track position and swath coverage Although it is separate the Sea Scan plotter interacts very closely with the data collection and sonar image presentation Any section of the sonar image may be directly correlated to its position on the Sea Scan plotter This allows unprecedented real time site location from sonar images Seafloor features may be marked on the Sea Scan plotter by simply clicking th
55. 64 colors may be edited 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 1 Select a base scale to change the entire custom color SAS EN CHERS EE scale to the corresponding predetermined color scale Base Scale __ Custom Color Scale vx This list allows you to easily modify one of the Copper ll predetermined color scales or to use one of these color scales simply as a starting point 2 Select one of the Scale Modification buttons to perform a transformation on the entire color scale The Brighten salbue Green 139 Darken Blue 88 Figure 4 7 Custom Color Scale Dialog Selected Color and Darken buttons increase and decrease the color inver intensities by 5 respectively The nvert button inverts the entire color scale lal alo Lely 3 Click on a color square in the Custom Color Scale group The selection marker a dark box around the color square indicates the selected color The original color is displayed on the left side in the Selected Color group In addition the corresponding RGB Red Green and Blue values are displayed in the appropriate RGB edit text boxes 4 Change the red component value by entering a valid number from 0 to 255 in the corresponding edit text box Any number greater than 255 will be reset to 255 automatical
56. 78 Length Gaara aUi 78 78 13 Object Height Measurement 79 OVervieW 79 Factors Affecting Height Measurement 79 Transducer Object and Object s Shadow Geometry 79 Range RE r et te 79 Height Measurement Dialog 80 80 Display Height Measurement 0 2 80 M aA 80 A MODE VIEW 80 Bottom Object Shadow iii 80 Geometry and Height Calculation 81 81 Measuring the Height of an Object secrece cout darea aaa Aaaa ada Ka EEan eaaa nAaR 81 Single Calcula O sesso 81 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Contents
57. Annotations check box again or select the Annotations Show menu item in the Options menu again The number of active annotations is always displayed to the right of the Show Annotations check box Thus you can monitor the number of active annotations even when the annotation symbols are not displayed in the sonar image 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 85 4 14 5 Customize Annotation Shortcuts 4 14 5 1 Overview This dialog allows you to modify the selection of dentifier Custonize Annotation Shorlouts buttons in both the Add and Edit Annotation dialogs You also edit the entry text of up to six custom dentifier buttons Crab Pot Custom2 k Custom3 Custom4 5 Custom6 Figure 4 45 Customize Annotation Shortcuts Dialog 4 14 5 2 Setting Active Identifier Buttons The dentifier buttons in the Add and Edit Annotation dialogs are used to enter identification text in the annotation comment As indicated earlier in this section although only six dentifier buttons are visible at a time you may select from a large list of possible dentifier buttons The possible dentifier buttons and their associated text are displayed in this dialog Select the icon to include the item as one of the six visible dentifier buttons The button will appear pressed indicating that it has been selected as one of the six
58. Clear Track Select the Clear Track button in the plotter tool bar to clear the plotter The track positions and estimated swath coverage lines are erased Hold the Control key and select the Clear Track button in the plotter tool bar to undo the latest Clear 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 54 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 7 9 Track action As long as the navigational information still exists in the position buffer the track positions and estimate swath coverage lines will be redrawn on the plotter Markers and waypoints are not cleared To erase markers and waypoints please refer to the markers and waypoints description above Import Survey Plotter kal Select the Import Survey button in the plotter tool bar to import a survey plotter A standard File Open dialog will appear and you are prompted to select a valid MSTIFF data file mst Any existing information recorded on the survey plotter is deleted The survey plotter stored in the selected MSTIFF data file replaces the existing survey plotter 4 7 10 Draw to Survey Plotter Select the Draw to Survey Plotter check box to draw the navigational information including the estimated swath coverage on the survey plotter When selected the check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white If the check box is not selected the incoming navigational information is not drawn to the survey plotter This check box allows
59. Parameters Overview The operating parameters affect the manner in which the data is collected and processed Any of the operating parameters may be changed at any time during the operation of the Sea Scan PC Any changes to the operating parameters are effective immediately Power Control Turning Power On Turn the power on and start the data collection process by selecting the Power button in the Sea Scan tool bar The Power button will appear pressed down and backlight with the color red Power will be supplied to the transducers immediately The transducers ping emit the acoustic pulse and then the incoming reflection data is recorded and displayed in the data window 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 35 Towfish Frequency in kHz When you turn the power on you are prompted to select ee the transducer frequency If you are using a multiple frequency system with multi frequency transducers you 150 will be able to select both the low and high frequencies a This information is only for data collection 900 800 review purposes and does not affect the actual ei frequency of the transducers You must select the 2400 2400 proper frequency for the recorded information to be Unknown valid If the user option to record the frequency has been disabled the frequency will be recorded as Figure 4 10 Towfish Frequency Dialog Unknown
60. Scan PC be installed for some of these versions specifically the High Speed and High Resolution Gain version s As of Sea Scan PC version 1 7 0 this requirement has been eliminated Sea Scan PC version 1 7 0 and above have the ability to automatically configure itself to use our newer PC104 boards Our older PC104 boards that used the High Speed and High Resolution Gain need to be configured manually using the SSPC INI file All of the entries needed to configure the special PC104 board modes have to be placed in the Operating Mode section of this file Failure to place the entries there will result in improper operation of the PC 104 sonar system card and will very likely cause the sonar data to be collected in a sub optimal manner For more information on sonar system card types and how to tell them apart please refer to the Sea Scan PC System Board Configuration Troubleshooting section 1881 7 6 1 High Speed Gain The High Speed Gain entry is a Boolean TRUE or FALSE value Entering TRUE will cause all of the gain slider ranges to be brought in by a factor of 4 Entering FALSE will turn off the high speed 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 188 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 gain ranges This feature will only work correctly when used with the appropriate hardware 7 6 2 High Resolution Gain The High Resolution Gain entry is a Boolean TRUE or FALSE value Entering TRUE will turn on the high re
61. Sentence The output contact sentence is modeled after the protocol outlined in the NMEA 0183 Standard for Interfacing Marine Electronic Navigational Devices version 2 1 The NMEA 0183 protocol allows marine instruments to transmit and receive information via a serial cable In fact the NMEA 0183 protocol allows for proprietary sentences A proprietary sentence must contain a unique talker identifier that begins with a P followed by a three character identification code The output contact sentence using PCON as the unique talker identifier The time stamp in the PCON sentence is dependent on the time zone environment variable that the host operating system provides for Sea Scan PC If the time zone environment variable is not set the time reported in the PCON sentence may be incorrect For more information on setting the time zone environment variable please refer to Setting the Time 181 in the Appendices The proprietary PCON sentence contains ten fields The first six fields are identical in format to the ZDA sentence that is used for time and date The time and date in these fields refers to the time and date of the sonar data line on which the contact marker is located This set of fields informs the external device the time and date that the contact was scanned by the Sea Scan PC The next four fields are identical in format to the first four fields of the WPL sentence that is used for waypoint location This set of fields informs the
62. Strength Target or Deviation from Target Tolerance levels in the Automatic Gain Settings dialog and attempt the automatic gain process again AutoGain is having difficulty setting Both LEFT and RIGHT gain settings Do you want to Accept Or 1 Figure 4 28 Automatic Gain Action Dialog Sea Scan PC AutoGain If you would like to interrupt the automatic gain The AutoGain operation has been temporarily paused Do you want to Accept and then Stop AutoGain process simply click on the Automatic Gain button again You will be prompted for further action This is essentially the same dialog that is presented when the automatic gain process is having difficulty and prompts you for further action You may either accept the gain settings for either or both of the active channels continue or stop the entire automatic gain process Or Figure 4 29 Automatic Gain Pause Dialog aon ww 4 9 4 2 Automatic Gain Settings Select the Settings AutoGain menu item in the Options Automatic Gain Settings menu to set the automatic gain settings The Automatic Interval Gain Settings dialog is displayed The dialog consists of Manual in two sections the Interval section and the Background 5 minutes Strength section To make a selection in the Interval Ur section place the cursor on the corresponding radio button then press and release the left mouse button The selected radio butt
63. Towfish Altitude This field indicates the altitude of the towfish in meters at the time of the navigational record A blank indicates an invalid value Fathometer Parameters Water Depth This field indicates the latest water depth in meters at the time of the navigational record A blank indicates an invalid value Magnetometer Parameters Reading This field indicates the latest magnetic field reading in gammas from the magnetometer at the time of the navigational record A blank indicates an invalid value Min Max Interval Reading These fields indicate the minimum and maximum readings in the interval since the last navigational record The minimum and maximum readings indicate the level of activity in the time between navigational records A blank indicates an invalid value 7 1 4 2 3 Data Storage Information Each of the data storage sections is framed by the ASCII line STARTDATA at the beginning and the ASCII line STOPDATA at the end Each data storage section consists of four lines with the following information Data Pathname This line identifies the pathname of the data file and the filename Version This line designates the data file version The line consists of the word Version followed by a space and then the version number Begin End System Time The begin and end system time lines store the timestamp for the first begin system time and last end system time line of the data stored in the data file The timestamp is the syst
64. a ay possible range within the total possible range is displayed in lt Active Range light gray The active range that which is being looked at by the Sea Scan PC within the possible range is displayed in white Figure 4 26 Color Coding for Gain Window 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 64 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 9 3 3 4 9 3 4 The color coding is useful to determine the areas of the TGC that are actually affecting the active range Only the sections of the TGC that are highlighted with a white background are in the active range and thus being applied to the raw echo returns If the Sea Scan PC is set to use both channels then an active range is displayed for both channels However if the Sea Scan PC is set to use only the left channel there is no active range as highlighted with a white background for the right channel Likewise if the Sea Scan PC is set to use only the right channel there is no active range for the left channel Time Gain Compensation and Signal Response Display The Time Gain Compensation and Signal Response component displays the TGC curves for the two channels The blue TGC curves are representations of the actual curves They are only useful as estimates of the actual TGC curves that are applied to the raw analog signals The TGC curves for the two channels are displayed as the amount of gain applied to the raw echo returns for specific rang
65. a continuous virtual bottom has been created The virtual seafloor consists of a slightly sloped bottom increasing in slope from the east to the west This sloping bottom results in an increasingly greater acoustic return as recorded on the sonar record line when the sonar beam is looking to the west since it is looking upslope More significantly there is a large patch of symmetric sand ripples They appear every four meters and are oriented in a north south direction The sand ripples are confined to a 1600 x 1600 meter area The edges of the square shaped area run along the north south and east west directions The lower left corner is located 100 meters to the west and south of the intersection of the prime meridian and the equator Along each sonar record line the acoustic response from the consecutive symmetric sand ripples appears as a saw tooth pattern The acoustic response increases quickly on the facing slope and then diminishes slowly along the backside of the sand ripple There is a high intensity band through this patch of sand ripples This band simulates a change in the bottom geology The data for every sonar record line depends on the current position and heading For every ping the current position and heading are used to determine what the transducers see on the virtual bottom Since there may be multiple pings between each update from the simulated GPS the current position is extrapolated from the last
66. a edni nani negates 157 Testing Serial Communciation Event Marker ss 158 6 opin band enmeceamedwdnsacnaeanatens 5 22 aea aeaa EAEan AAAA aA Ea tenait OVGIVIOW Host Remote Settings sise Testing Serial Communication Host Remote 7 Es EE E RER RS 161 22 2 0 00 sipescvcecedcectenndeaes catystedhes sndecdeendsuseesenttesthesctis 161 Sea Scan PC Software 162 anne s nets sert 162 Output Settings 522451222824 de era ha au Anaad dade these de dies es 162 Testing Serial Communication Output sise 162 Real TIME ta san tac annee RS one sean 163 E E E E E E E E A E saterusetsvecesioncssusdeseieseuasdecssateevesctiesesssenezeee 163 Settings
67. a new initialization file exiting the application without saving the settings and leaving the settings ssreview ini unchanged or canceling the command to exit and return to the application Selecting the Save option is the only option that will recall the current settings automatically the next time you start the Sea Scan PC Review application Prompt to save modified marker list The Sea Scan PC Review application maintains a global marker list The markers from each data file that has been loaded are inserted in the global marker list See 5 6 7 Marker Lists p 5 18 for more information about the global marker list If this user option is enabled the global marker list has been modified you will be prompted to save the list when you shutdown the Sea Scan PC Review application Disable this option if you are not concerned about the global marker list However when enabled and the global marker list has been modified you are asked if you would like to save the modified list as a mkr file when you exit the application A dialog is displayed that lists the number of markers that have been added and the number of marker Ids that have been changed You are asked Do you want to save the global marker list before you exit Select the Yes button to save the list A standard File Save dialog will appear prompting you for a filename and path Select the No button to exit the application without saving the list Alternatively select t
68. a quick visual cue for range from the towfish For example if you have selected 20 meters as the range interval the range markers will be placed over both channels of the sonar image data every 20 meters They are displayed in an intermittent format The range markers are displayed for 30 lines and then skipped for 50 lines The intermittent display results ina vertical dashed line marking the selected range interval Status Boxes This command displays a pop up menu that allows you to toggle the display of status boxes Each status box allows you to monitor a specific task related to the Sea Scan PC operation When a status dialog is visible a check mark will appear next to the respective menu item To remove the status dialog select the menu item again Show All This command allows you to display all the available status boxes Close All This command allows you to close all the status boxes that are currently visible External Devices This command displays a dialog that displays the current status of the external devices The External Input Output Status dialog is described in detail in Monitoring External Devices 1401 Data Storage This command displays a dialog that displays the current status of the data storage The Data Storage Status dialog is described in detail in Monitoring Data s AutoGain This command displays a dialog that displays the current status of the automatic gain operation The A
69. accurately calculate the area of features in the sonar record Factors Affecting Area Measurement Apparent Speed Over Ground Measuring the ping separation distance is completely dependent on the apparent speed over ground SOG Typically the apparent SOG matches the true SOG In this situation the sonar image has a constant 1 1 aspect ratio since the ping separation distances are valid However if the apparent and true SOGs were not matched then the ping separation distance will not be accurate The extent of the error depends entirely on the extent of the error between the apparent SOG and the true SOG For example if the apparent SOG is set at 3 6 knots and the true SOG is 4 0 knots there is a 10 error The ping separation distance is 10 too short because the Sea Scan PC thinks it is only moving at 3 6 knots instead of the 4 0 knots it is actually moving The Sea Scan PC is not pinging fast enough to maintain the 1 1 aspect ratio for the sonar image The undersampling will shorten features Using the given example the measured area of the shortened feature will be 10 too small Measuring Area Overview You can measure the area of any object or group of discontinuous objects on the screen using the cursor An Area dialog is used to display the area and select the area measurement tools The area is displayed using the square of the universal units of length 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 129
70. allows the adjustment of the time out values used in maintaining constant navigation data for the operator s use The Time Since Last Valid Fix specifies the amount of time in seconds that Sea Scan PC will wait until it decides that there is no valid navigation data being received The default is 10 seconds If a navigation string is received in more than this time out or if there is no navigation data for this time out Sea Scan PC will mark the incoming image data as having no valid navigation fixes This will hinder the operator s ability to place markers on targets It is advisable to leave this set at the default value unless you have relatively spotty navigation data The Time Out section also allows the adjustment of the amount of time that Sea Scan PC will interpolate or in other words intelligently guess the current navigational fixes For GPS s that put out a navigation fix every two seconds this time out would be at least 2 seconds It is advisable to leave this set at the default value of 10 seconds unless you have relatively spotty navigation data Plotter Swath Display The Plotter Swath Display section allows the user to choose between Course Over Ground and Heading for the swath display the plotter Please refer to Plotter under the Sea Scan PC Software 191 section for information on the swath display Choose the Use COG from RMA or VTG sentence to use Course Over Ground to point your swath display Choose the U
71. allows you to perform functions that are related to the Options operation and monitoring of the Sea Scan PC and display and storage of j gt the sonar data Annotations Range Marker gt Status Boxes gt Settings Mode Annotations Show Add This command displays a pop up menu of annotation commands The Edit Annotation process is described in detail in Annotations 82 Customize Annotations Show This command toggles the display of the annotation symbols in the sonar image data When the annotation symbols are displayed a check mark will appear next to this menu item To remove the annotation symbols from the sonar image select this menu item again Annotations Add This command allows you to add an annotation to the sonar image Annotations Edit This command allows you to edit the annotations that are present in the sonar image Annotation Customize This command allows you to customize the annotation Comment Short Cut buttons 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 22 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Range Marker Range markers are also called scale lines since they are scale reference lines displayed in the sonar image This command displays a list of possible ranges for the range markers The current range marker setting is indicated with a check mark Range markers are placed over the sonar image at the designated interval to provide
72. and External Device Status box Mode Communications Port The Communication Port section displays the current serial port settings for the external devices If an external device is disabled the text of the corresponding communication port settings is dimmed The communication port settings are displayed using the standard format External Device Mode The External Device Mode section displays the current operational mode for the external devices The text of the corresponding mode is dimmed if the external device is disabled or off The mode displayed is different for each external device 6 1 2 Communications Port Settings Display In all cases the communication port settings are displayed in a standard format The serial port is written as COM where the represents the serial port The baud rate is then displayed followed by the number of data bits parity and the number of stop bits For example COM2 9600 8 N 1 represents serial port 2 9600 bits per second 8 data bits none parity and 1 stop bit 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 6 1 3 Setting Communications Port Settings 6 1 3 1 6 2 6 2 1 The Communications Settings dialog allows you to set the communications settings for the different external devices Select the Comm button in the Settings dialog for each external devices to display the Communications Settings dialog Select the Communications port Bits per second Data bits Parity and S
73. and longitude L L of the survey vessel for the navigational information record The latitude and longitude are written in a standard format as degrees and decimal minutes followed by an ASCII character designating the hemisphere There is not a comma between the degrees and decimal minutes For the hemisphere N S E and W represent north south east and west respectively This field contains the true course over ground for the navigational information record This field contains the speed over ground in knots for the navigational information record These fields contain the primary and secondary time delay used in the Loran C latitude longitude calculation for the navigational information record A blank indicates an invalid value This required field indicates the channel mode in use at the time of the navigational record The channel field is LEFT RIGHT or BOTH This required field indicates the transducer range in meters at the time of the navigational record This required field indicates the transducer frequency in kHz at the time of the navigational record The frequency may be listed as Unknown This field indicates the range delay in meters in use at the time of the navigational record This field indicates the power state of the transducers at the time of the navigational record The power be ON or OFF 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 172 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5
74. application name in the caption bar 4 2 3 3 External Menu The External menu lists all the external devices used in the operation of External the Sea Scan PC The menu item for each external device displays a pop up menu This pop up menu allows you to either display a dialog to Fathometer change the device s settings or a dialog to test the serial communications Magnetometer for the specific external device See External 37 for more Navigation gt information about the External menu Event Maker HostRemote gt Output Real Time 4 4 2 3 4 Help Menu The Help menu allows you to access the on line help for the Sea Help Scan PC application and the About dialog ES F1 Search for Help on About Contents This command displays the Contents page of the Sea Scan PC on line help This is a good starting page to find general help about the application This menu item is disabled if the Sea Scan PC on line help does not exist Search for Help on This command displays the Search dialog for the Sea Scan PC on line help This dialog allows you to search for keywords in the on line help This menu item is disabled if the Sea Scan PC on line help does not exist 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 25 About This command displays the About dialog for the Sea Scan PC application To remove the About dialog press the OK button
75. as degrees and decimal minutes followed by an ASCII character designating the hemisphere There is not a separator between the degrees and decimal minutes For the hemisphere N S E and W represent north south east and west respectively This field indicates the water depth in meters A blank indicates an invalid value This optional field contains the altitude of the transducers in meters The field is blank if the towfish altitude is invalid or not available 7 1 5 3 Sample Fathometer Survey File 7 1 6 7 1 6 1 7 1 6 2 The following is an example of a valid fathometer survey file In this case the towfish altitude is not available and the optional field is left blank SeaScanPC FathometerFile Version 4 Y2KDate 20001201 Y2KTime 43205 Date Friday December 01 2000 Time 12 00 05 EST SysTime 311096 DataMode TRAINING TimeStamp SysTime Julian Y2K FileFormat Comma delimited 313149 00335 43207 20001201 43207 0000 001 N 00000 001 24 81 315178 00335 43210 20001201 43210 0000 003 00000 003 24 93 317219 00335 43212 20001201 43212 0000 004 N 00000 004 E 25 06 319254 00335 43214 20001201 43214 0000 005 N 00000 005 E 25 18 Magnetometer Survey File Overview By default the magnetometer survey file uses the mag extension Although these are simple ASCII text files and would normally use the txt file name extension the use of this specific extension facilitates the sea
76. at a higher resolution since you are using a shorter range Range Delay Dialog The Range Delay dialog allows you to set the range delay graphically and set the altitude SOTHChanneis Data Scroll DOWN mode Apart from the caption bar the Range 300 150 T T 150 300 Delay dialog consists of the Range Delay Description Diagram Slider section the Range Delay Mode ge 5 The range delay Description section and the Diagram section offsets the active area of the swath Figure 4 38 Range Delay Dialog Range Delay Slider The Range Delay Slider section allows you to set the range delay The current geometry of the system is used to create a top view of the towfish The active area of the swath that is viewed is based on the current range and range delay For example if the data direction is set to scroll down the towfish is visually represented pointing up If the Sea Scan PC is set to use only the left channel at the 50 meter range a 100 meter swath is displayed to the left of the towfish A red bar is used to indicate the active area of the swath The numbers on either end of the red bar indicate the extents of the active range Using the above example if the range delay is set to 7 5 meters the red bar will be offset to the left and the active range is indicated as 7 5 to 57 5 meters on the appropriate ends of the red bar To adjust the range delay 1 Place
77. button then press and release the left mouse button The selected radio button will now appear marked and the previously selected radio button will be cleared Only one radio button may be selected at any time Communication Port The Communication Port section displays the current serial port settings for the Host Remote interface If the Host Remote feature is enabled select the Comm button to change the serial port settings See Setting Communications Port Settings 14 for more information on changing the serial port settings for an external device Testing Serial Communication Host Remote Ove rview HostRemote 1 9600 8 1 You may test the serial communications of the Host Remote interface by selecting the Host Remote Test Communications menu item Au Communication from the External menu This menu command displays a dialog that displays the serial port settings and checks the availability composition and integrity of the serial transmissions The dialog consists of a single nput section and the ms Log and OK buttons remove the dialog Figure 6 19 Serial Communications Test select the OK button or select the Host Remote Dialog Host Remote Test Communications menu item from the External menu again to return to normal operation Device and Serial Port Settings The serial port settings are displayed in the caption of the Input section Input The Input section displays a conti
78. connected to the metal shell of the connector We highly recommend the use of a serial cable with a shield and a DB 9 or DB 25 connector with a metal shell Follow standard wiring practices when attaching the connector If you have any questions please call the Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Technical Support Line Fathometer Overview DB 25 Figure 6 2 Communications Figure 6 3 Serial Port Connector This chapter describes how the Sea Scan PC obtains and makes use of water depth information from an external source An external source such as a fathometer determines the current water depth The external source continuously sends the water depth information over either a serial cable that is connected to a serial port of the Sea Scan PC computer or via a MIL STD 1553A B data bus The Sea Scan PC is informed when incoming information arrives and then looks for the new water depth 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 142 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 6 2 2 6 2 2 1 information The water depth information is processed for use by the Sea Scan PC application Water Depth Information NMEA 0183 Sentences The NMEA 0183 Standard for Interfacing Marine Electronic Navigational Devices version 2 1 was adopted by the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA on October 15 1995 The NMEA 0183 protocol allows marine instruments to transmit and receive information via a se
79. crosshatched pattern and the area of the region is displayed in the status window 1 Select the Area button in the plotter tool bar The cursor will change to the measurement cursor and the message Measure area will appear the status window Measure area 2 Place the cursor along the edge of the region you would like to measure and press the left mouse button The current location will be displayed in the status window 3 Keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the mouse along the edge of the region you would like to measure A red outline is drawn to indicate the path of the mouse as it is moved to the final position The location of the cursor is continuously updated as the cursor is moved around the outline of the region 4 When at the final position release the left mouse button A straight line is drawn from the final position to the initial position to close the outline around the region Upon successfully calculating the area the measured area is displayed in the status window The outlined region used for the area measurement is indicated in the Sea Scan plotter with red crosshatched pattern The most recent information remains in the status window until another area measurement is made or a marker is selected or another action that makes use of the status window is selected Alternatively the status window may be cleared at any time 1 114 km j by clicking in the window 4 7 8
80. data display in the data window Scaling The Scaling section allows the operator to set the default scales and the ambient magnetic field for the magnetometer strip chart The difference between the current total geomagnetic field reading and the ambient magnetic field is displayed in the magnetometer strip chart at two scales red and blue Each vertical line in the strip chart represents unit in gammas as determined by the Red Data and Blue Data selections The default ambient magnetic field may be entered at this point If the ambient magnetic field is not known the average total geomagnetic field may be used as the ambient magnetic field Refer to Geomagnetic Field Data Display 149 for information on how to quickly reset the value used for the ambient field while collecting the geomagnetic readings Communication Port The Communication Port section displays the current serial port settings for the magnetometer input magnetometer input is enabled select the Comm button to change the serial port settings Please refer to the G 880 Magnetometer User s Manual for the recommended serial port settings Testing Communication Magnetometer Overview You may test the communications of the external magnetometer device by selecting the Magnetometer Test Communications menu item from the External menu This menu command displays a dialog that displays the serial port settings and checks the availability composition and integrit
81. delay can be anywhere from 0 meters up to a distance equal to the current range In other words if the current range is 50 meters the Sea Scan PC can be set to delay up to 50 meters Start End Figure 4 37 Range Delay 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 75 4 11 2 4 11 2 1 4 11 2 2 The most common use for the range delay is for water column removal This is the process whereby the section of the sonar record that displays the acoustic returns as the sonar beam passes through the water column is removed Typically you are not interested in the acoustic returns as the sonar beam passes through the water column Thus set the range delay to the same distance as the towfish altitude to ignore any acoustic returns as the sonar beam passes through the water column The Sea Scan PC will then start looking at the acoustic returns once the sonar beam has reached the range set by the range delay In this case this range is the seafloor The other use for the range delay is to extend the view of the sonar but for a specific range For example you want to look in the ranges of 75 to 175 meters and are not particularly interested in the first 75 meters You would lose resolution using a range of 200 meters and you would be looking at everything from 0 to 200 meters However you can set the range to 100 meters and set the range delay at 75 meters You will be able to look at the area of interest
82. feature more appropriately named the target identification edit feature has been significantly enhanced to allow you to edit the complete marker information for estimated and nadir markers In the Sea Scan PC plotter you can only edit the name of the marker From the Sea Scan PC Review plotter you can edit every aspect of the information related to the marker such as the slider positions that determine the target height and position along the sonar swath line The clear track feature has been enhanced to allow you to erase any bad position fixes that have been mistakenly included in the stored navigational information The Sea Scan PC Review plotter tool bar contains three new buttons the Print and Read Save Settings buttons A global marker list has been introduced that compiles a comprehensive list of all the markers from each data file that was loaded The markers from any data file that is read by the Sea Scan PC Review application are automatically transferred to the global marker list The global marker list is a simple way to compile a complete marker list for a specific set of data files 5 6 2 Plotter Display When the Sea Scan PC Review application opens a new data file the navigational information that was stored in the data file is processed and displayed by the plotter The current plotter is automatically configured with the position information Thus the survey vessel s track is centered on the current plotter when it is displa
83. features in the sonar image with a valid L L position based on the axial distance from the transducers See 4 7 12 Plotter Sonar Image Interaction p 4 33 for more information on the plotter and sonar image interaction When the COG is available from the external source it is displayed in the information window in numeric format 0 359 Itis also displayed 045 0 graphically as a ship in a compass rosette with north always as up in the information window of the Sea Scan plotter 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 153 6 4 2 6 It is possible that an invalid COG is read or the COG is not available for an extended time more than 10 seconds In either case the invalid or nonexistent COG is not processed or displayed The latest valid COG will continue to be used to update the estimated swath coverage and also be used as the heading for subsequent sonar record lines to correlate features in the sonar image with a L L position When the Sea Scan PC receives the next valid COG it is displayed and used to update the estimated swath coverage Time Delays The time delays TDs are provided by the NMEA 0183 RMA and GTD sentences When the external navigational device is a Loran C unit the primary and secondary TDs are recorded with the other navigational information The recording of the TDs is a background process You do not control the TD logging process The TDs are not used by t
84. image 5 2 4 4 Preview This set of controls allows you to quickly preview sonar data files The Preview buttons allow you to quickly cycle through the sonar data files The preview image of each sonar data file is displayed The actual sonar data file may be subsequently loaded 5 2 5 Data Window 5 3 5 3 1 5 3 2 User Parameters Overview Setting User Settings Select the Settings User menu item in the Options menu to set the user settings The User Options dialog is displayed The dialog consists of three sections the Shutdown Options section the Runtime Options section Data Modification Alert section and the Special Features section To enable an option place the cursor on the corresponding check box then press and release the left mouse button A check mark will appear in the check box when the option is enabled Each of these controls is duplicated in the Options menu The annotation options are described in detail in Annotations 821 User Options E Shutdown Options Prompt before save default settings Prompt to save modified marker list Runtime Options Display warning for development file versions Display marker transfer information Prompt to save data file when Image has been filtered Annotations have been modified _ Navigation has been modified Marker list has been modified Special Functions High Speed Gain Ranges High Resolution Gain
85. image buffer To scroll up one line press the up arrow at the top of the scroll bar once The visible portion of the data window will scroll up the image buffer by one line To scroll up a significant number of lines at a time press the space between the scroll thumb and the up arrow You cannot scroll above the top of the data window To scroll up continuously hold the up arrow down Alternatively select the scroll thumb and while keeping the mouse button pressed move the scroll thumb up The position of the scroll thumb relative to the top and bottom of the scroll bar will set the position of the visible portion of the data window 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 34 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 4 5 4 5 4 5 1 4 5 2 4 5 2 1 To scroll down one line press the down arrow at the bottom of the scroll bar once The visible portion of the data window will scroll down the image buffer by one line To scroll down a significant number of lines at a time press the space between the scroll thumb and the down arrow You cannot scroll below the bottom of the data window To scroll down continuously hold the down arrow down Alternatively select the scroll thumb and while keeping the mouse button pressed move the scroll thumb down The position of the scroll thumb relative to the top and bottom of the scroll bar will set the position of the visible portion of the data window Units A consistent
86. in detail in Automatic Gain 65 651 Survey File This command displays a dialog that enables you to set the items that are to be recorded in the optional survey files The survey file options are described detail in Setting Survey File Settings 911 User This command displays a dialog that enables you to set various user options The startup and shutdown automatic and runtime options may be adjusted depending on the operating preference The user options are described in detail in User Parameters 271 Display This command displays a dialog that enables you to set the data display parameters The scroll direction may be set according to the operator s preference The display parameters are described in detail in Display Parameters 291 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 24 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Units This command displays a dialog that enables you to set the length speed and location units A consistent set of units is used throughout the application Mode This command allows you to select the operating mode of the Sea Scan i PC By default you will always start the application in active mode the Active normal operating mode However for training purposes you may select Training training mode using this menu item The current mode is indicated with a check mark In addition when in training mode TRAINING is displayed on either side of the
87. is placed in the data automatically The distance traveled which is used to determine the placement of the event markers is an internal calculation based on the apparent speed over ground See Speed Control 37 for more information about the apparent and true speed over ground Automatically Include The Sea Scan PC can include the current location and date time in the comment field of the event annotation To enable an event annotation option place the cursor on the corresponding check box then press and release the left mouse button A check mark will appear in the check box when the option is enabled Communication Port The Communication Port section displays the current serial port settings for the external trigger device If the External Trigger mode is enabled select the Comm button to change the serial port settings See Setting Communications Port Settings 141 for more information on changing the serial port settings for an external device Testing Serial Communciation Event Marker Overview You may test the serial communications of the external event trigger device by selecting the Event Marker Test Communications menu item from the External menu This menu command displays a dialog that displays the serial port settings and checks the availability composition and integrity of the serial transmissions The dialog consists of a single Input section and the Log and OK buttons To remove the dialog select the OK button or
88. main survey You cannot append to an existing survey file from within the Sea Scan PC program A unique filename is created every time a survey file is created Since the files are simple ASCII text files you can merge related survey files using a text editor However you must be certain the time correlation information is the same for both survey files The time correlation information will not be the same if Windows has been restarted in between the creation of two survey files Setting Survey File Settings Select the Settings Survey File menu item in the Options menu to set the survey file settings The Survey File Options v vpt mmoneter MAG magnetometer dialog is displayed The dialog consists of eight sections the timestamp H Files section Timestamp section Navigational Input section E Operations section Side Scan Parameters section lt Y lt empianoatfme 4 Barge Delay Navigational Input S Fathometer Parameters section Magnetometer Parameters ee ee ai Ait 1 Position UTM section and the File Format section There are a number of Dee ee 22770 items that are required such as the System Time and Loran Time Delays Position To enable an optional item place the cursor the operations eos corresponding check box then press and release the left Ei nies eral Format mouse button check mark will appear in
89. moving the cursor The Height Measurement dialog will appear The Height Measurement dialog consists of five sections the B mode view the A mode view the Bottom Object and Shadow sliders the geometry and height calculation view and the OK button B Mode View The B Mode view section displays the selected B Mode line with neighboring sonar record lines B mode The selected line is marked at either end of the image This viewing mode provides a visual reference of the object and shadow that Distances meters Height 0414 Range 5 25 you should be familiar with This is the same viewing mode that is used to display the sonar toe record lines in the data window The pixel value no altitude 0 94 along a horizontal line represents the intensity of L the acoustic return at that position along the Figure 4 42 Object Height Measurement Dialog sonar record line The B mode view provides a general overview of the selected line when positioning the sliders for the height calculation A Mode View The A Mode view section displays the selected line in A mode This viewing mode provides a visual reference of the acoustic returns on a single sonar record line This bar chart view displays the acoustic return intensity in the vertical axis The vertical lines along the horizontal axis represent the intensity of the acoustic returns at the respective positions along
90. names directory names also fall under this restriction 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Appendices 179 7 2 4 7 2 5 7 3 Limited Directory Depth Win16 programs also have a limited directory depth This depth is about 10 levels Please do not place any data any more than directories deep Marine Sonic Technology Ltd recommends that a data directory is placed in the root directory and named with a name of no more than 8 characters We usually use SSPCDATA for the directory name Data Collection Sea Scan PC communicates with the ISA PC104 Sonar Hardware using a user mode driver This driver works under Window 3 1 98 98Se and Me When creating Windows XP Microsoft created the Hardware Abstraction Layer HAL This prevents any applications from using a user mode driver This prevents Sea Scan PC from talking to the ISA PC104 Sonar Hardware in Windows XP In order to be able to collect data with Sea Scan PC in Windows XP a device driver has to be installed As of version 1 8 of Sea Scan PC a device driver is available for use with Windows XP Please contact Marine Sonic Technology for more information Quick Button Reference Here is a list of buttons and their associated functions It can be used to quickly look up what a button does 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 180 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 7 3 1 Sea Scan PC Task Bar Decrease Range Butto
91. pressed once Decrement the selected range by pressing the left arrow button in the Range Settings group in the Sea Scan tool bar For example the range will be decreased from 75 to 50 meters when the left arrow button is pressed once 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 36 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 5 4 4 5 4 1 4 5 4 2 4 5 5 4 5 5 1 4 5 5 2 Channel Mode Overview The Channel Mode group in the Sea Scan tool bar consists of a button for the left channel mode both channel mode and one for the right H channel mode Only one of the channel mode buttons be selected at one time The channel mode button for the currently active channel mode will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white The images in the channel mode buttons reflect the data scroll direction In data down direction the left and right channels on the left and right sides respectively In data up direction the left and right channels are on the right and left sides respectively The button images change to reflect the current data scroll direction You may set the Sea Scan PC to display either the left channel only the right channel only or both the left and right channels simultaneously Depending on the operating requirements you may want to view both channels at standard axial resolution or only one of the channels at double the axial resolution When viewing only on
92. range delay tool Hght Button activates the height tool Inc Button increases the gain Dec Button decreases the gain Edits an annotation on the image Adds an annotation to the image 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Appendices 181 7 3 2 Plotter 7 4 7 4 1 Configure Plotters Manually To Any Location Zoom In Pan Centers At Point In View Show Swath Sonar Coverage Show Depth Fathometer Draw Shoreline Coastal Navigate To A Waypoint Clear The Plotter Add a Waypoint W Mouse Delete A Waypoint W Mouse Read and Place Previous Markers Waypoints in Potter Measure Distance Show Current Plotter Import Previous Survey Plotter Setting the Time Zone Ele Configure Plotters Automatically At Present Location Zoom Out Cycle Back To Previous Views Show Survey Track Set Depth Colors Fathometer Grid On Off Navigate Between 2 Waypoints Rename Markers or Waypoints Manually Enter a Waypoint Lat Long Delete a marker W Mouse Save a Marker Waypoint File Measure an Area On Ploiter Show Survey Plotter Engage Survey Plotter It may be necessary to inform Sea Scan PC of the correct time zone in which the data collection computer resides The time zone affects the setting of the computer s clock using the ZDA 155 sentence and the time stamp sent out with PCON 161 In order for Sea Scan PC to read the correct time zone
93. scroll speed is adjustable The slider indicates the automatic scroll speed of the group review process Move the slider to the left to slow down the automatic scroll speed Alternatively move the slider to the right to increase the automatic scroll speed Printing Data Overview Sea Scan PC Review allows you to print the entire sonar image or any section of the sonar image at any size with the default printer You may specify a custom print image and a custom zoom factor Print images that do not fit on a single page are printed on multiple pages Icons in the file information header indicate the relative position of the print image for each page in a multiple page print operation You may also print the images of the current and survey plotters and a list of the markers currently displayed in the plotter There is some lose of resolution when printing the image This is due to the grayscale and resolution limitations of the printer 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 135 5 14 2 Print Dialog Sea Scan PC Review allows you to print the entire sonar mener image or any section of the sonar image at any size with the default printer You may specify a custom print Por Lem image and a custom zoom factor Print images that do gy not fit on a single page are printed on multiple pages Time Date 5 21 35 02 20 1995 Icons in the file inform
94. select the Event Marker Test Communications menu item from the External menu again to return to normal operation Serial Port Settings The serial port settings are displayed in the caption of the Input section Input The Input section displays a scrolling list of the input sentences that have been received from the external event trigger device Each event sentence is suffixed with an identification number Log Select the Log button to record the incoming serial transmissions from the external device for debugging and analysis in a communications log file You will be prompted by the Select Communications Log File dialog to set a filename preferably with the c f extension and a destination directory for the communications log file Upon selection of a valid filename and location the Sea Scan PC will place some header information in the file and then all subsequent incoming transmissions from the external device The raw information will be logged until you close the Serial Communications Test dialog and return to normal operations This communications log file is very useful for debugging difficulties with external devices 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 159 6 6 6 6 1 6 6 2 6 6 2 1 6 6 2 2 Host Remote Overview The Host Remote feature allows a self contained Host Sea Scan PC system to be controlled by a Remote computer via an RS232 serial line This feature allows a self con
95. set of units for length speed and location are used CASemm throughout the entire Sea Scan PC application To set the units JE select the Units menu item from the Options Settings pop up English ft mi Metric kmih Nautical yd nm English 6 Kenca menu The Units dialog will appear Nautical knots Location LatLong Sig digits 3 Detaut 1 Figure 4 9 Units Settings Dialog Select the desired units for both the length and speed measurements and the display of location information The length units are used for all length and distance measurements such as those found in the Height and Rng Bearing dialogs The appropriate dimension either meters or kilometers for metric units feet or miles for english units and yards or nautical miles for nautical units is used to display the length The speed units are used for the Speed Over Ground display The location units are used to display the location information In Lat Long mode the number of significant digits for the minutes can be set The conversion from latitude and longitude to UTM coordinates is based on the equations from USGS Bulletin 1532 using the WGS 84 model Save the new units selection by clicking the OK button The new units are recorded and the Units dialog is cleared from the screen The Sea Scan PC will redisplay all length speed and location information using the new units Operating
96. status window is cleared of the Add waypoint message The number of the waypoint for example 14 is automatically used to create the unique identifier strings for example Waypt0014 The identifier string may be changed at any time 4 7 5 7 Waypoint Type Waypoints may be placed on the Sea Scan plotter to mark a location by entering either the L L or UTM coordinates These waypoints are useful to identify precisely positioned predefined sites and survey routes Select the Waypoint Type button in the plotter tool bar The Waypoint Entry dialog is displayed In Lat Long mode enter the latitude and longitude of the waypoint coordinate by setting the degrees minutes and decimal minutes values in the appropriate text boxes Set the latitude hemisphere by clicking either the North or South button For example if the northern hemisphere is selected the North button will appear pressed down and backlight by the color white Similarly set the longitude hemisphere by clicking either the East or West button In UTM mode enter the northing easting and zone information in the appropriate text boxes Enter the identifier string The string may be up to 31 characters without any spaces A default string consisting of the name Waypt and the number of the new waypoint for example Waypt0014 is assigned in the identifier string text box The identifier string is used to uniquely identify the markers and waypoints The identifier string may b
97. temporary list attached to the current data file It is possible that the unique internal identification number for a marker will need to be changed if a marker already exists in the global marker list with this same number The number of markers that have modified in this manner is listed as Num ID Changed Monitoring Marker Transfer Information The Marker Transfer Information dialog is displayed when markers are transferred to the global marker list This occurs when a new data file that contains markers is opened The Marker Transfer Information dialog displays the number of markers that are transferred from the file marker list to the global marker list Furthermore the number of internal identification numbers that were changed is listed See Global Marker List above for more information about the internal identification number 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 117 5 6 7 3 5 6 7 4 The option to display the Marker Transfer Information dialog be disabled in the user options See Setting User Settings 103 for more information about the user options Save Global Marker List The global marker list may be saved to disk Even markers and waypoints that are not visible within the plotter boundary coordinates are stored Save Global Marker List Standard Select the Markers Save As menu item from the Options menu to save the global marker list in a mkr marker file A Save Waypoin
98. the current plotter when it is displayed The image of the survey plotter from the data file is displayed when the survey plotter is made active Plotter Overview The features of the integrated Sea Scan plotter in the Sea Scan PC Review are identical to their counterparts in the Sea Scan PC program except for a few minor exceptions Only these minor exceptions will be discussed in detail in this chapter For all other feature descriptions please refer to the corresponding feature descriptions for the Sea Scan PC plotter in Plotter 38 The major difference between the Sea Scan PC Review plotter and the Sea Scan PC plotter is the aspect of real time navigational input display For obvious reasons the Sea Scan PC Review plotter does not display real time navigational information It displays the navigational information that was stored with the image buffer in the data file In the Sea Scan PC plotter the information window is used to display the real time navigational information The range bearing and track survey features are used to display the range and bearing to and from selected markers based on the real time navigational information Since the Sea Scan PC Review plotter does not have any need for real time navigational information the information window and the range bearing and track survey features are not present 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 113 The marker rename
99. the object Maintaining the same operational conditions such as in water cable length and height off the bottom make a subsequent pass in the opposite direction As the object appears again create a second marker in the plotter by double clicking with the right button on the object The layback distance is half of the distance between the two navigation points as indicated by the two markers in the plotter Be certain to measure from the sonar data line nadirs on which the markers are located and not from the markers themselves Note that this layback is only valid as long as the operational parameters such as towfish height off the bottom and in water cable length do not change This method works best in areas of minor mass water flow Mass water flow due to tides and currents can significantly influence the layback Layback Lookup Chart A layback lookup chart is a useful operational tool Figure 4 34 Double Pass Layback Estimate Method for estimating layback However the generation of a layback lookup chart specific to your ce operational conditions requires a considerable Er effort A standard lookup chart plots the layback 2 vs cable length at varying speeds separate chart should be made for different towfish and depressor combinations Once the layback chart able Length is compiled you can simply estimate the layback based on cable length and the towfish speed Figure 4
100. the rest of the Sea Scan PC User s Manual To complement the manual we highly recommend either Side Scan Sonar Record Interpretation by Charles Mazel or Sound Underwater Images A Guide to the Generation and Interpretation of Side Scan Sonar Data by John P Fish and H Arnold Carr The up to date book by Fish and Carr although technically detailed in parts is an excellent reference book for both beginners and experts The book by Charles Mazel is geared more towards the beginner Both are comprehensive works on the basic operations and principles of sonar systems If you are not already an experienced side scan operator either of these books should greatly increase your operating capability and sonar record interpretation skill It is highly recommended that the operator is familiar with the contents of at least one of these books preferably the book by Fish and Carr and the Sea Scan PC User s Manual We highly recommend you familiarize yourself with the Sea Scan PC software in training mode before using the system at sea 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Section 2 e Equipment Equipment 2 Equipment The Sea Scan PC equipment is described in a separate document that is customized for each configuration Some of these documents are listed here e Maintenance Trouble Shooting and Repair Manual for Sea Scan PC Splash Proof System Sea Scan PC Centurion Operation Troubleshooting and Maintenance e Sea S
101. the right side 4 14 2 3 Comment The Comment section displays the current annotation comment The comment may be any valid ASCII text The comment is entered by either manually typing the text or using the shortcut buttons Any text is entered the current insertion point in the comment The flashing vertical bar marks the insertion point Figure 4 43 Add Annotation Dialog 4 14 2 4 Comment Shortcut Buttons The Comment Shortcut buttons allow you to quickly enter default text into the comment section When using the Shortcut buttons a hyphen and spaces offset the default text when it is entered in the annotation comment The hyphen and spaces keep the shortcut text entries separate and distinct from each other and any text that has already been typed in The first group the dentifier buttons is used to enter identification text in the F3 annotation comment Although only 6 dentifier buttons are visible in the Add Annotations dialog you may select from a large list of possible dentifier buttons In gt this example the dentifier buttons are from left to right and top to bottom Dockposts Fish Pipe Rocks Ship and Custom Text 1 When the Dockposts 1 button in the upper left corner is pressed Dockposts is entered at the insertion point in the annotation comment Likewise when the Rocks button in the middle right is pressed Rocks is entered at the ins
102. the sonar image can be assigned a L L position based on its offset from the source along the swath the L L position of the source and the orientation of the swath If the L L position of the source for the sonar record line is available the selected feature will be marked on the plotter with one of the two marker types Estimated Marker 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 57 Heading Offset from Source Slant Range corrected Calculate position of feature based on Click on a feature in the sonar image estimated position of Towdish Lat Long selects a specific sonar data line Towfish and sonar data line onentation COG sets an offset along line from the source offset along line from the source Figure 4 19 Calculation of Lat Long for Estimated Marker If the COG is available the marker position is determined as described above The actual position along the length of the swath is used to mark the selected feature This is known as an estimated position and is marked with a red square The default identifier string consists of the name Est followed by the marker number for example Est0015 You may change this name at any time using the Rename Marker button in the plotter tool bar Nadir Marker Lat Long Calculate position of feature based on estimated position of Towfish Lat Long do not know orientation of Towfish and sonar data line so cannot de
103. valid position using the last valid heading and the apparent SOG This extrapolation between navigational information updates may cause some distortion when using a high ping rate short range and fast apparent speed Switching to Training Mode By default you will always start the Sea Scan PC program in active mode the normal operating mode Select the Mode menu item in the Options menu to change to the training mode A pop up menu will appear The current mode either active or training mode is marked with a check mark Select the menu item Training from the Mode pop up menu The Sea Scan PC will be switched to training mode When in training mode the word TRAINING is displayed on either side of the application name in the caption bar Any data in the image buffer is cleared information from the external devices is cleared and the Sea Scan plotter is reset Thus any data that exists will be lost If you do not want to lose any existing data or any real information from the external devices before switching to training mode save the sonar image file first The display parameters such as the color scale and data scrolling direction are not changed However the Sea Scan plotter parameters are modified The bounds for both the current and survey plotters are changed so the simulated vessel s track will be properly displayed 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 95 4 17 4 Switching
104. vessel One can accurately estimate the separation distance of the towfish and the antenna For deeper water operations it is often times more difficult to estimate layback especially with longer lengths of in water cable However in these very specific situations with longer lengths of in water cable it becomes increasingly more important to estimate layback properly The accuracy of the layback estimate directly affects the accuracy of target positioning The basis of the positioning of targets in the sonar data record assumes accurate positioning of the towfish The positioning of the towfish is never exact but the closer the estimate to the actual position the better the accuracy of the target positions There are a number of reliable methods to estimate layback These methods work best in areas of minor mass water flow Mass water flow due to tides and currents can significantly influence the layback For example if the survey vessel is moving against the current the towfish speed relative to the water is increased and thus the drag force on the in water cable is increased also The increased drag force will lift the towfish up off the bottom and increase the layback Alternatively when moving with the current the drag force on the in water cable is less and the layback will be decreased 4 10 2 1 Single Pass If you are fortunate to have an object that is visible both above and below the water surface such as a buoy channel marker or pie
105. waypoint attribute status are displayed If the closest marker is a waypoint then the description Waypoint is displayed Otherwise the active inactive status of the marker as described above is displayed as ACTIVE and INACTIVE respectively If the marker attributes such as target height have previously been set the active inactive status is followed by SET Alternatively if the marker attributes have not yet been set the status is followed by CLR 3 Press and release the left mouse button to select the current marker When you select a marker in the plotter with the target Re aa edit feature the Sea Scan PC Target Identification dialog will appear The dialog is essentially identical to moa its counterpart in the Sea Scan PC application Please i refer to Plotter Sonar Image Interaction Marking a Feature Standard Method 55 more detailed em information However you can print the target identification information directly from the dialog in the ae Sea Scan Review application Select the Print toch Same as ship locaton button to print the target transducer and external Sn information The A Mode and B Mode views of the ES fx Slant Range 26 0m selected sonar data line are printed The orientation view and the surrounding water depth and magnetic Figure 5 13 Target Identification Dialog field readings if they are available are
106. will be off by 10 also In fact they will be 10 too short because the Sea Scan PC thinks it is only moving at 3 6 knots instead of the 4 0 knots it is actually moving The Sea Scan PC will not be pinging fast enough to maintain the 1 1 aspect ratio for the sonar image The undersampling will shorten features Thus when measuring the transverse length a shortened feature will be 10 too short in the given example Range Delay When measuring an object that is on both sides of the towfish you must consider the effect of the range delay settings Do not forget that the range is the distance from the towfish that the Sea Scan PC will display for both channels This range may be delayed up to a distance equal to the range by setting the range delay When a range delay has been set the image on the screen has been offset from the towfish Thus when measuring objects that are on sonar lines that are offset in this manner the Sea Scan PC must consider the distance of the offset in the length calculation The offset must be considered in two separate manners depending on the range delay mode As described in detail in Range Delay 751 the range delay mode simply defines the manner in which the range delay is interpreted When the range delay mode is set to range delay equal to towfish altitude the range delay is considered to be the altitude of the towfish This interpretation of the range delay is us
107. works in conjunction with the type of sonar system card that was used to collect the data being opened For files that were created with Sea Scan PC version 1 7 0 and above you can safely ignore this section and should make sure that none of the options are checked If you have data files that were created with Sea Scan PC version 1 6 14 and below then you will also be able to ignore this section Please make sure that none of the options are checked If you have data that was collected with Sea Scan PC High Speed version 1 0 4 and below please make sure that the High Speed Gain Ranges option is checked If you have data that was collected with Sea Scan PC Extended Gain any version please make sure that the High Resolution Gain option is checked Finally if you have data that was recorded with Sea Scan PC High Speed version 1 0 5 please make sure both options are checked Please note that this does not compromise Sea Scan PC Review s ability to view image data mark targets and view navigational data This does however affect the program s ability to display the gain curve correctly in the Line Information 1011 window 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 106 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 4 Display rameters 5 4 1 Data Direction The data direction may be set to scroll up or down the screen To set the data direction select the corresponding button in the Sea Scan tool bar The Towfish Up Scro
108. you to select when the incoming navigational information is recorded on the survey plotter 4 7 11 Active Plotter Selection Both the current and survey plotters are displayed in the single display window The Current Plotter and Survey Plotter buttons toggle the display of the active plotter in the display window Select the Current Plotter button to display the current plotter in the display window The Current Plotter button will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white The word CURRENT is written to the lower right corner of the plotter in the display window to indicate the current plotter is displayed Similarly select the Survey Plotter button to display the survey plotter in the display window The Survey Plotter button will now appear pressed down and backlight with the color white The word SURVEY is written to the lower right corner of the plotter in the display window to indicate the survey plotter is displayed The track points and swath coverage lines are written to both plotters no matter which plotter is displayed in the display window You cannot perform certain operations on the survey plotter such as clear the track positions When setting boundary coordinates and display parameters with any of the functions accessed from the plotter tool bar the changes affect the active plotter only For example if the current plotter is active and you select the Automatic Configuration button the current plotter boundary c
109. 2 Color Look Up Table 6 bit You can manipulate the color look up table for the zoom image The look up table Image threshold selection process and action buttons are similar in operation to the look up table action buttons outlined in Color Look Up Table Window Look Up _ Table Buttons 108 for the entire sonar image These buttons only operate on the zoom image However in addition select the Apply LUT button to apply the zoom DOI image color look up table to the entire image TIFF Select the Save As TIFF button to save the current zoom image as a TIFF TIFF is a standard file format for images thus allowing the zoom image to be imported by most third party image processing applications and word processors You will be prompted to name the file and location A default file name with a unique sequential numbering scheme is preset for automatic data storage The image is recorded in the current color scale using the current color look up table transformation Filter Overview Filt This chapter describes the features of the Sea Scan filter The filter operation mel allows you to process the raw sonar image data with a variety of filters to accentuate different aspects of the image Although each of the filters is described it is recommended to try the various filters to see the resulting effects After you have taken into account image resolution and system capabilities it is understood that there is no absol
110. 35 Sample Layback Lookup Chart relative to the water by referring to the chart Using the single pass or double pass method described above create a plot with the cable length on the x axis and layback on the y axis Make multiple passes of the target at a constant speed with varying cable lengths Plot the layback vs cable length for this speed Repeat this procedure at one to two knot increments Transponder The layback can be determined using a transponder system such as a Trackpoint Il transponder on the towfish Rebalance the towfish before deployment and determine the layback using the transponder system Modify the layback settings in the Layback dialog as necessary 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Place a 74 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 10 3 Towfish Layback Dialog The Layback dialog allows you to set the towfish layback graphically You can set a lateral layback indicating the offset fx distance from port to starboard and an axial layback the offset distance astern or forward z Apart from the caption bar the Layback dialog consists of the Enable Layback check box the X Lateral and Y Axial layback edit controls and the Diagram section 5m Figure 4 36 Layback Dialog 4 10 3 1 Displaying Layback Dialog 7 Laybk Select the Layback button in the Sea Scan tool bar to display the Layback dialog 4 10 3 2 Setting Layb
111. 4 3 4 1 Cable Handling System Navigational Device Sea Scan PC Tow Cable Control Computer Towfish Video Recording Equipment Figure 3 5 Complete Sea Scan PC System Sea Scan PC Operation Overview This subsection will outline the general procedures for operating the Sea Scan PC The outline assumes that a search or survey site is selected and towpaths are pre plotted This is a simplified version of an actual sonar operation and should serve only as a guideline for a more involved search operation 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sonar Operation 15 3 4 2 3 4 3 3 4 3 1 3 4 3 2 Starting the Operation There are a number of elements that must be considered before starting a search or survey operation The operator should determine a number of initial parameters to ensure the smooth beginning of the survey Ship s Track Sonar Range If you have not already done so before you have left the dock set up the Sea Scan PC system Test all components of the system before leaving the dock including either a rub test or a quick and simple in water test of the towfish Set the operating parameters in the Sea Scan PC application for the survey Refer to Operating Parameters 3 and Automatic Save for more details Figure 3 6 Search and Start yo
112. 51 GC data window takes up most of the screen to the right of the Sea Scan tool bar and below the information window The data window displays the sonar image data for the currently opened data file The window is always 512 pixels horizontally however depending on the screen resolution the number of vertical pixels may vary You may view all of the lines in the data window by scrolling up or down the screen with the vertical scroll bar There are a number of parameters you can set to modify the user interface according to both your level of expertise and your operational requirements Figure 5 4 User Settings Dialog 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 104 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 3 2 1 Shutdown Options Prompt before save default settings This option enables the Sea Scan PC Review Save Settings dialog when you shutdown the Sea Scan PC Review application Disable this option if you want to have the current settings saved automatically However when enabled if any of the settings have changed you are asked if you would like to save the new settings in the initialization file when you exit the application dialog is displayed that lists both the original and new settings Any settings that have been changed are highlighted in red You have the options of saving the current settings in the default initialization file ssreview ini saving the current settings in
113. Menu The Help menu allows you to access the on line help for the Sea Help Scan PC Review application and the About dialog Tne F1 Search for Help on About Contents This command displays the Contents page of the Sea Scan PC Review on line help This is a good starting page to find general help about the application This menu item is disabled if the Sea Scan PC Review on line help does not exist 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 102 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 2 3 5 2 4 5 2 4 1 5 2 4 2 Search for Help on This command displays the Search dialog for the Sea Scan PC Review on line help This dialog allows you to search for keywords in the on line help This menu item is disabled if the Sea Scan PC Review on line help does not exist About This command displays the About dialog for the Sea Scan PC Review application To remove the About dialog press the OK button Information Window CRABPOTS MST B 20m Full The information window is located directly below the pr eae menu bar It displays the filename of the currently opened data file The range and range delay indicator the resolution mode and the active color scale are also displayed in the information window In this example image the filename is CRABPOTS MST the cursor is currently on a 20 meter sonar data line with both channels and no range delay and the data is in Full res
114. NETAN A E 123 Selecting Filter Op ration reves tnennntaruestenene prenne 123 Point Operation Sse aa inner triennal lever rite 123 ais 124 Color Look Up Table 52 dasi 126 Recording 126 Useful Filter Sequences Filtering Entire Data File 9 Length Measurement 10 Area Measurement sessed sageeseaeeeeeseeeeeneenees Factors Affecting Area 128 Apparent Speed Over Grounde s2 icc adic ie tee 128 Measuring Area sranie 128
115. Open menu item from the Options menu to read markers from a mkr marker file An Open Marker File dialog will appear prompting you for the filename and path of a valid waypoint file Upon selection of a valid waypoint data file the plotter will attempt to read all of the markers and waypoints If for any reason the Sea Scan plotter cannot read all of the markers and waypoints you will be informed of the number of successful reads The new number of markers and waypoints is displayed in the status window The new markers and waypoints from the waypoint data file are displayed immediately although some may not be visible in the current plotter boundary coordinates To ensure that you can see all of the markers and waypoints select the Automatic Configuration button while holding down the Control key This will automatically center the track points as well as all the markers Furthermore all markers and waypoints are automatically transferred to both the global marker list and the file marker list 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 118 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 7 5 7 1 5 7 2 Zoom Sea Scan PC Review allows you to zoom in on any section of the sonar image The selected section is displayed in a separate window that floats on top of the data window containing the raw sonar data You may perform multiple zooms on the selected section and also measure features contained in the zoo
116. PANU Gs 143 Sea Scan Software ssvvsvcecsecovcsscseesseessessecscvscsvenscssceeverersvetvanccessssecbecsecervatessscteeteessctavsoecevseteacssceavsvavesstevssevranes 143 OVGIVIOW E Te 143 Fathometer Setting S ai c2c cc icc te 144 Testing Communication Fathometer sen 144 Fathometen 145 Target Identification Dialog Water Depth ss 145 Training Mode Simulated Data sise 146 3 awaa AAA aana E a aa iiaa ea a aeaaeae aai 146 LOATA EAA AA EEEE EEE E E E SR EE E 146 Geomagnetic Information 146 RER ARR RAR Mee A es nt ea ana deen arate ahah 146 Geometrics G 866 146 Geometrics G 880 147 JW Fisher Proton titine aa tartare 147 5
117. Scan PC control computer listener The Sea Scan PC polls the incoming NMEA 0183 sentences looking for the current navigational information The Sea Scan PC looks for the navigational information in the following sentences RMC Recommended Minimum Specific GPS TRANSIT Data RMA Recommended Minimum Specific Loran C Data GGA Global Positioning System Fix Data GLL Geographic Position Latitude Longitude VTG Course Over Ground and Ground Speed HDT Heading True GTD Geographical Position Loran C Time Delays The Sea Scan PC allows you to reset the computer system clock based on the external GPS time provided by the ZDA Time amp Date sentence MIL STD 1553 The Sea Scan PC application accepts navigational information using the MIL STD 1553 data bus The MIL STD 1553 protocol is available from Marine Sonic Technology Ltd on request Latitude and Longitude The latitude and longitude L L pair is provided by the NMEA 0183 RMA RMC GGA and GLL sentences and the MIL STD 1553 transmission The L L pair is always expressed in degrees decimal minutes and the hemisphere DD MM MMMN S E W The L L pair is used to plot the survey vessel s current position on the Sea Scan plotter The timestamp for the L L position is also logged enabling the Sea Scan PC software to correlate each sonar record line with a L L position See Plotter Sonar Image Interaction 55 for more information on the plotter and sonar image interaction
118. Sea Scan PC Review application is to try it We recommend you try the Sea Scan PC Review application using one of the provided sample data files to get you started 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 98 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 2 5 2 1 5 2 2 5 2 2 1 Screen Layout Overview The Sea Scan screen may be divided into functional sections the Menu bar the Sea Scan tool bar the information window and finally the data window Figure 5 1 Sea Scan PC Review Screen Layout Menu Bar The menu bar is located directly below the caption bar It contains the menus for use with the Sea Scan PC Review application File menu The File menu allows you to perform system functions File that are not directly related to viewing the sonar image Open Data File Preview Data File Save Save as Print Exit Open Survey This command is currently not available In future versions of the Sea Scan PC Review it will allow you to open a main survey file This feature is intended to allow you to review an entire survey as a group instead of just reviewing single data files Open Data File This command allows you to open a Sea Scan PC data file You will be prompted by the Open SSPC Data File dialog to select a valid Sea Scan PC data file Upon selection of a valid Sea Scan PC data file a Sea Scan PC Data File Open dialog is
119. Sea Scan PC was in 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Appendices 171 training or active mode is also written The header then displays the list of items that are recorded in the survey file This list contains mandatory and optional items as selected by the user in the Survey File Options dialog 7 1 4 2 2 Navigational and External Information Each of the separate navigational information sections is framed by the ASCII line STARTNAV at the beginning and the ASCII line STOPNAV at the end Each subsequent line in the survey file contains a complete set of navigational and external information Commas or tabs as selected by the operator in the Survey File Options dialog separate the information fields Each line is delimited at the end by the character Each line of information may consist of Timestamp System Timestamp Julian Date Time This required field contains the timestamp for the navigational information record The timestamp is the number of milliseconds elapsed since Windows was started This field contains the Julian date and time for the navigational information record Y2K compliant Date Time This field contains the year 200 compliant date and time for the Navigational Input Position Course Over Ground Speed Over Ground Time Delays Side Scan Parameters Channel Range Frequency Range Delay Power navigational information record These required fields contain the latitude
120. T A00125 lt CR gt lt LF gt is a valid numbered event trigger sentence The Sea Scan PC automatically includes 125 the identification number in the comment field of the resulting event annotation The identification number must contain five digits and be zero padded 6 5 3 6 5 3 1 Sea Scan PC Software Overview The event markers can be placed in the sonar image automatically In this case an event marker is placed in the sonar image at a prescribed distance interval Alternatively an external device may be used to trigger an event marker to indicate any aspect of the sonar image such as the start and end of a survey leg The external source periodically sends an event trigger sentence over a serial cable that is connected to a serial port of the Sea Scan PC computer The Sea Scan PC is informed when an incoming serial transmission arrives and then looks for the trigger signal Upon receiving the trigger signal the Sea Scan PC places an event marker at the current sonar data line 6 5 3 2 Event Marker Settings Select the Event Marker Settings menu item in the External menu to set the event marker settings The Event Marker Settings dialog is displayed The dialog consists of three sections the Mode section the Automatic Event Interval section the Automatically Include section and the Communication Port section Mode The Mode section determines the event marker mode To select a mode place the cursor on the corresponding radio bu
121. Tool bar preview is essentially the same as the Sea Scan PC Data File Preview dialog Once a data file has been opened and displayed in the data window the preview image is displayed in the preview section of the tool bar You may now make use of the tool bar preview controls The current data file is located in a directory in the computer file system All the Sea Scan PC data files in the directory are considered to be a data set The data files in the data set are organized in ascending alphabetical order 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 111 the list using the Preview Previous and Preview Next buttons Click the Preview Previous button to preview the previous data file in the data set Similarly click the Preview Next button to preview the next data file in the data set The image in the preview section of the tool bar is updated with the new preview image At the beginning of the list the Preview Previous button is disabled Similarly at the end of the list the Preview Next button is disabled You can preview any of the data files in the data set by cycling through If the current preview image does not correspond with the currently loaded data file the Load Current Selection button is enabled Click the Load Current Selection button to load the corresponding data file of the current preview image The data file corresponding to the current preview image is read into the Sea Scan PC Rev
122. VG WW cis nan an lie 93 Creating ride 93 14 Training MOG 94 1817 4121 E A E E 94 Simulated Sonar Data cieivsivecsssncasecscencsscecsecceensesscsncancevsedsedeeceicessessastescevsonesuveisaienssocssuscenteeasanssncendatdevseiesisersesesed 94 Switching to Training 94 Switching to Active 6 si sepatectteaes 95 Section 5 Sea Scan Review 97 1 OVERVIOW 97 2 2 98 OTA RER RER E E E E SE a 98 202200 EE EE E E E A E EE A AE 98 File men ket a eea ea ea Ee SEa oet 98 Options ea teaa needed Vaaa iaia 99
123. W Cable EP EEE E ES E E E 184 Cable Pinouts 184 Pigtail Pinouts 185 Using the Portable Test Re Rent en NS i ie panes 185 21 186 55 187 6 Sea Scan System Board Configuration ss inisneenns 187 High Speed Gain 187 High Resolution este teens entente 188 High Speed Ping Limit di 188 188 7 111 a ea raame aaea a ar aa a a aa E aa Aaaa aa aa aE aeaa 189 BOOKS E E E E E E ET 189 E E A E E E OE E A A A ETA 189 Products sacecscezecedecccscescstscesssonesuctucecces
124. Windows documents tif for TIFFs for Excel spreadsheets etc Marine Sonic Technology Ltd has adopted the file extensions mst for the Sea Scan PC data files for the marker waypoint text files and svy for the main survey log file among others NOTE Marine Sonic Technology Ltd retains the rights on the Sea Scan PC file formats and publishes the formats only for the express use of its Sea Scan PC clients Image Data File Overview By default the sonar image data file uses the mst extension The use of this specific extension facilitates the search of MSTL Sea Scan PC data files by the Sea Scan PC Review application Marine Sonic Technology Ltd has adopted a variation of the TIFF Tagged Interchange File Format to store the data generated by the Sea Scan PC application Although the new Marine Sonic TIFF MSTIFF makes use of similar storage conventions as a standard TIFF it should not be considered a TIFF MSTIFF has been designed to be a basic data format for the Marine Sonic Technology Ltd sonar data files A high priority was given to structuring the data in such a way to minimize any difficulties for future additions This format allows for additions and enhancements to the data file as the capabilities of the Sea Scan PC improve MSTIFF was designed to be an extensible data format The MSTIFF format is modeled after the TIFF Tagged Interchange File Format Specification Revision 5 0 Aldus Corp
125. a Scan PC Operation scene 14 10 ARR Re Re RER E E E E E E A E 14 Starting the Operation 15 22 2 AE E E TEE NEEE 15 search Methodology item E a aE a nasi 15 15 Site Feature 16 5 Safety 16 Section 4 Sea Scan PC Software 19 1 OVERVICW 20222000 eee ee ea eee a eee eee eect dette ne 19 2 Screen 1 92 0 Be Tp NN EN SO 20 21 RARE 20 Bal MST EE EEE EEE ER E 20 Menu Bar dsritisedqnnenensare see epetser 20 File MOU RS EE Ars er 20 Options
126. a and zoom windows will change immediately to the newly selected color scale The name of the selected color scale is displayed in the Sea Scan tool bar Note The traditional Gray scale is fair for imaging However we have found the Bronze and Gold scales have a larger perceived dynamic range since the eye senses a greater contrast differential between neighboring shades without losing a sense of color continuity Inverting the Color Scale Any of the color scales may be inverted such that the high intensity returns become dark and the low intensity returns become light This is the display setting for traditional sonar systems since they wrote black ink for acoustic returns on light brownish paper The higher the intensity of the acoustic return the more black ink was used The dark ink on light paper process necessitated the reversal in natural intensity visualization on the part of the sonar operator In normal mode as opposed to the inverted mode any high intensity returns are brighter than the darker background This provides a view of the seafloor analogous to illuminating the seafloor with light and viewing from above Objects appear brighter than the background and shadows are black In inverted mode objects are darker than the background and shadows are white To invert the currently selected color scale select the Invert Color Scale check box in the Sea Scan tool bar The color scale in the information window and anywhere the
127. a direction select the Display menu item from the Scroll Direction Options Settings pop up menu The Display Settings dialog will appear Select the desired scroll direction Scroll Data Down will cause the data to cascade down from the top The left channel will appear on the left of the screen Alternatively Scroll Figure 4 8 Display Settings Dialog Data Up will cause the data to scroll up from the bottom The left channel will appear on the right of the screen Save the new scroll direction by clicking the OK button The new scroll direction is recorded and the Display Settings dialog is cleared from the screen The Sea Scan PC will regenerate the existing sonar image data for the new perspective in the data window If the image has been scrolled the scroll position will be maintained after the sonar image data has been regenerated The channel mode buttons will reflect the data scroll direction 4 4 4 Scrolling 4 4 4 1 Overview As described in figure 4 1 in the Sea Scan PC Software Overview 191 the active sonar image is maintained in an image buffer The screen cannot display all the lines of the image buffer at once When the sonar image scrolls off the top or bottom of the screen depending on the data direction it has not disappeared It has simply scrolled past the currently visible portion of the data window Using the vertical scroll bar along the right side of the data window you may scroll the sonar image
128. a stream 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 143 6 2 2 2 6 2 2 3 6 2 2 4 6 2 3 6 2 3 1 Please refer to the G 880 Magnetometer User s Manual for the recommended method to determine the correct values for the bias and scale depth calibration values The G 880 magnetometer option must already be selected as the input device in the magnetometer settings for this option to be available MIL STD 1553 The Sea Scan PC application accepts fathometer data using the MIL STD 1553 data bus The MIL STD 1553 protocol is available from Marine Sonic Technology Ltd on request Water Depth The NMEA 0183 DPT DBS and RAY sentences the proprietary sentences and the MIL STD 1553 transmission provide the water depth The water depth is recorded to provide additional information about the survey area The water depth can be plotted on the Sea Scan plotter The timestamp for the water depth is also logged enabling the Sea Scan PC software to correlate each sonar record line with a water depth Altitude The altitude is provided by the Proprietary DPT Altitude sentence and the MIL STD 1553 transmission The altitude is used to preset the Bottom slider for the target height calculation in the Target Identification dialog The altitude is also recorded to provide additional information about the survey operation The timestamp for the altitude is logged enabling the Sea Scan PC software to correlate each son
129. aces the pixel of interest with the median pixel intensity from the sorted list The Maximal operation replaces the pixel of interest with the maximum pixel intensity from the sorted list Statistical Nonlinear Noise Reduction The Spike 1 filter operation will remove speckle from the image Speckle noise will creep into the 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 126 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 8 4 5 5 8 4 6 5 8 5 sonar image if there is an electrical noise problem The Spike 2 filter operation will remove horizontal streak noise from the image Horizontal streaks will appear in the sonar image in there is a source of acoustic noise such as a depth sounder The acoustic noise is typically limited to one horizontal line thus appearing as a horizontal streak in the sonar image Color Look Up Table Operations The Color Look Up Table operations such as inverting and contrast stretching the look up table are described in detail in Color Look Up 12 The look up table operations are applied directly to the sample filtered image Recording a Filter Sequence You can record a sequence of filter operations used on the sample image and then apply this sequence to the entire sonar image Select the Record check box to begin recording the selected filter operations The Record check box will appear pressed down indicating that any filter operations applied to the sample image will be r
130. ack Enter values in the X Lateral and Y Axial edit controls to set the layback distances At 0 0 the towfish is considered to be in the same location as the null point of the survey vessel the location of the antenna of the external navigation device A negative and a positive value for the X Lateral distance sets the layback to the left and right respectively of the null point of the survey vessel Similarly a negative and a positive value for the Y Axial distance set the layback to the fore and aft respectively of the null point of the survey vessel Select the Enable Layback check box to enable the layback When a check mark appears in the control the layback is enabled 4 10 3 3 Diagram The orientation of the survey vessel and the towfish are displayed in a two dimensional view The diagram allows you to properly orient the lateral and axial layback for your current operating situation A scale is displayed in the lower right corner of the diagram The length of the vertical and horizontal lines of the scale is indicated in meters 4 11 Range Delay 4 11 1 Overview The Range Delay represents the distance or range the Sea Scan mms PC is to wait or delay before is starts to look at the acoustic Range Delay returns For example if the range is 50 meters and the range delay is set to 7 5 meters the sonar record line will record data that is in the range of 7 5 to 57 5 meters as opposed to 0 to 50 meters The range
131. al Time 6 8 1 Overview Sea Scan PC version 1 8 0 adds the ability to output the data that is collected in real time to another program using the host computers network connection This ability is primarily used for connecting to Real Time Mosaicing applications such as Sonar Wiz MAP from Chesapeake Technology In order to use this feature you will be required to have some knowledge about your computers network connections 6 8 2 Settings The real time interface sub menu can be found as one of External the options in the external menu in Sea Scan PC To Eathometer configure the real time interface select the Settings menu eee option k Event Marker gt Host Remote gt Output P Beal Time gt Status After clicking the Settings menu option the Real Time Settings dialog window will appear This window contains all of the configuration settings for the real Connect Network Not Connected Connection SG time interface Cancel IP Address 192 168 69 91 Port 6500 Click the OK or Cancel button when finished to close the Real Time Settings window Sonar WizMAP Sonar Data Stream The first step in setting up a real time interface is to configure the network Connection There basically are two options when configuring the network Connection These are Off and On The Off option is labeled The On option is not lab
132. alculation View The geometry of the transducer the object and the object s shadow used for the height calculation is displayed in a three dimensional view The geometry view allows for all the possible perspectives due to channel selection and data scrolling direction and altitude mode options The height and range of the object based on the calculation from the presented geometry are displayed in this section The altitude is also displayed so multiple calculations may be performed for stacked objects The height range and altitude are displayed in the current universal length units Transducer Information The Transducer Information section displays information about the transducers such as the recorded frequency range and range delay A valid depth is displayed if the information is available from an external fathometer The depth and altitude values are continuously updated as the Bottom slider is moved Measuring the Height of an Object Single Calculation 1 Select a line where the object and shadow are well defined In other words the object and shadow are strongly visible and well delineated from the background As described above place the line selection cursor on this preferred line Then press and release the left mouse button without moving the cursor 2 The Height Measurement dialog will appear The Bottom Object and Shadow sliders have not been set They are in starting default locations You must place them depen
133. alog consists of two sections Default Dimension 160 the Window Dimension section and the AutoGIF patie Dr Storage Directory section DASSPCDATA GIF Default Figure 5 17 Zoom Settings Dialog Window Dimension Enter the dimension in pixels of the default selection when the operator uses the quick zoom operation to make the selection for the zoom window The default dimension may be up to 160 pixels 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 119 5 7 3 5 7 4 5 7 4 1 AutoGIF Storage Directory Select the Browse button to browse the computer s file E system for a new default directory The AutoG F Network Destination dialog will appear Navigate through the computer s file system to select a default directory Select the new default directory by clicking the OK button or hitting Return You will be returned to the Drives Zoom Settings dialog and the new default directory is i poii H displayed Figure 5 18 AutoGIF Destination Dialog Auto GIF Operation The AutoGIF operation is a significant enhancement to the zoom window The AutoGIF operation includes a number of time saving operations that allow the operator to quickly generate a GIF file of the image in the zoom window A horizontal scale has been added along the top of the zoom image The scale indicates the absolute range from the transducers in mete
134. also printed 5 6 4 Clear Track The clear track feature operates little differently in the Sea Scan PC Review Plotter To clear the navigational position information you can either delete a single navigation point or a selected group of navigation points 1 Select the Clear Track button in the plotter tool bar to delete navigation points The cursor will change to the clear track cursor and the message Delete nav pts will appear in the status window 2 To delete a single navigation point move the cursor close to the navigation point you want to erase Then press and release the left mouse button The navigation point closest to the cursor is erased This action may not be undone If there are many navigation points close together you may want to zoom in on the group in order to select the correct navigation point without any problems To delete a selected group of navigation points move the cursor to one corner of the group Press the left mouse button and keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the mouse to the opposite corner of the group A black box will be drawn indicating the selected group as you move the mouse Upon releasing the left mouse button all navigation points within the black selection box will be erased 7 Delete nav pts 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 115 3 The Delete nav pts message is cleared from
135. altitude are updated every second The total water depth is a function of the latitude of the survey vessel The total water depth increases proportionally with the latitude however the value is railed to minimum and maximum values of 17 36 and 56 45 meters respectively In NMEA 0183 DPT mode the Offset distance from the transducer to the water line field is fixed as 0 89 meters In NMEA 0183 DPT Altitude mode the altitude of the Sea Scan PC transducers is directly proportional to the total water depth The altitude is set as ten percent of the total water depth The simulated incoming DPT sentence is modified according to the current fathometer input mode 6 3 Magnetometer 6 3 1 Overview This chapter describes how the Sea Scan PC obtains and makes use of geomagnetic information from an external source An external source such as a magnetometer determines the current total magnetic field The external source continuously sends the geomagnetic information over a serial cable that is connected to a serial port of the Sea Scan PC computer The Sea Scan PC is informed when incoming information arrives and then looks for the new geomagnetic information The geomagnetic information is processed for use by the Sea Scan PC application 6 3 2 Geomagnetic Information 6 3 2 1 ASCII The Sea Scan PC application recognizes a simple ASCII sentence that contains the total geomagnetic field reading in gammas from the magnetometer A sample serial transmission is as
136. an tool bar The button will appear pressed down and backlight with the color red This places the Sea Scan PC in manual speed control mode The Sea Scan PC will no longer look for the SOG from the external navigational source You may now manually control the apparent speed and subsequently the ping rate Spd Press the Speed Up and Speed Down buttons to increase and decrease the apparent speed by 0 1 knot steps You do not need to press the button for each 0 1 knot change in the speed By simply keeping the either of the Soeed buttons pressed down the apparent speed will continue to increase or decrease until you release the button The new apparent speed is written in the information window The ping rate is changed immediately Decreasing the apparent speed less than the true speed results in under sampling the seafloor and compressing features in the transverse axis The transducers do not ping often enough to maintain the 1 1 aspect ratio Similarly increasing the apparent speed greater that the true speed results in over sampling the seafloor and elongating features in the transverse axis The transducers ping too often to maintain the 1 1 aspect ratio Over sampling is useful in some instances such as when setting the gain controls In this case having the Sea Scan PC data scroll as fast as possible allows you to better monitor the effect on the sonar image as the gain controls are changed 4
137. anages to free it from the bottom bring the towfish up to the surface inspect it for damage and replace the shear pin as required 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Section 4 e Sea Scan PC Software Sea Scan PC Software 19 4 Sea Scan PC Software 4 1 Overview This chapter describes the operation of the Sea Scan PC application Detailed subsections S Sea Scan outlining the various features of the Sea Scan V1 8 0 PC application follow a brief overview Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Gloucester Virginia Avww marinesonic com Copyright 2006 MSTL 1 800 447 4804 Sea Scan PC uses Intel based computer with the WindowsO operating system for data display and system control If not started automatically the Sea Scan PC application is started from the Windows desktop by double clicking on theSea Scan PC icon The Sea Scan PC program allows you to control the sonar data collection process view analyze and save the sonar image with the related navigational information The program also features a sophisticated integrated plotter to plot location and estimated swath coverage The Sea Scan PC may be configured for different operating requirements These operating and display parameters are saved in an initialization file sspc ini The operating and display parameters are displayed graphically in the Sea Scan PC tool bar and the information window The basic function of the Sea Scan PC softw
138. ance button in the plotter tool bar cursor will change to the measurement cursor and the message Measure distance will appear in the status n window Measure distance 2 Center the cursor over the position on the plotter that you would like to measure from and press the left mouse button The current location will be displayed in the status window 3 Keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the 0 00 0885 0 00 656E 628m 128 8 mouse to the point you would like to measure to The location of the cursor and the distance and bearing from the starting position are continuously updated as the cursor is moved to the ending position 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 53 4 When at the ending position release the left mouse button The location of the ending position and the distance and bearing from the starting position will remain displayed in the status window The most recent information remains in the status window until another distance measurement is made or a marker is selected or another action that makes use of the status window is selected Alternatively the status window may be cleared at any time by clicking in the window 4 7 7 Measure Area You can measure an area of the Sea Scan plotter by tracing the outline with the cursor This feature is useful to measure the amount of area covered by a survey The outlined region is defined with a red
139. anced text services for this program Leam more about program compatibilty 3 Click the OK button From this point forward whenever the application is run the computer will switch to 256 color mode 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 178 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 7 2 2 2 7 2 2 3 7 2 3 Sometimes this method does not work properly If your user account on the Windows XP computer does not have administrator rights then there is a chance that this will not work In case this method fails please try using the advanced display properties to adjust the color depth Advanced Display Properties 1 Another method for setting the computer to 256 color mode is by using the advanced display properties Right click on the desktop Make sure that there is not an icon beneath the cursor This will show a menu Choose the properties menu selection The Display Properties window will now be visible 2 Click on the Settings tab 3 Click on the button labeled advanced Doing so will open the TG z Lm More Highest 32 bit Advanced Display Properties window identity Troubleshoot Advanced 4 Next click the Adapter tab 5 Then click on the List All Modes button This will display a list of all the display modes that your video card can be set to OpenGL Direct 30 Options Troubleshoot Color Management jadeon 7000 QY
140. anner For example you can place all the data files from a specific survey in a single directory Data files located in a directory can be thought of as belonging to a distinct group This grouping based on file location in a directory is the basis for the group review operation All the Sea Scan PC data files in a single directory are considered to be a group The group review operates on every data file in a selected group 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 133 5 13 3 Group Review Operation Open SSPC Data File Select the Group Review menu item from the Options menu to perform a group review a complete group of Ferme mst d msti cameo data files The Open SSPC Data File dialog will appear and you will be prompted to select the source directory lidador2 mst manifold mst and the starting file for the group review operation All of the files in the source directory listed after the starting ascending order will be included the group review operation mstl amp cameo Drives 5 pacific List files of type MSTIFF Files mst 7 Figure 5 28 Open SSPC Data File Upon selecting a valid starting file the starting file is Dialog opened by Sea Scan PC Review The image in the data window is then scrolled so the operator can view the entire image buffer auto
141. applied to the channels that are selected gain settings for the selected channels are changed immediately and the TGC display is updated with the new gain settings 4 9 3 6 Scroll Position Warning 4 9 4 4 9 4 1 When setting the gain it is often useful to watch the general response of the sonar Home signal to the new gain settings in the data window In order to see the immediate response the data window must be in the Home state As described in Home State 31 the state simply means the newest sonar line is displayed in the data window immediately The message Home is written in the Scroll Position Warning section to signify the current scroll position of the data window When not in the Home state the sonar image has been scrolled and the newest sonar line is no longer visible on the screen The data window is not in the Home state The message Not Home is written NOTH in the Scroll Position Warning section to warn you that the latest sonar data line ens which is being affected by the latest gain settings is not visible on the screen In these situations you will not be able to see the effect of the gain changes to the sonar data until the sonar data lines have scrolled in to the visible region of the data window For this reason you will probably want to ensure the data window is in the Home state while you are changing the gain settings Setting Gain Automatically
142. ar record line with an altitude Sea Scan PC Software Overview The water depth and altitude provide additional information about the survey operation The water depth can be plotted on the Sea Scan plotter When available the altitude allows for a more automatic target height calculation in the Target Identification dialog Furthermore if the water depth has been selected in the Survey File Options dialog the fathometer information is logged to both the main survey file and a dot fathometer survey file Refer to Fathometer Survey File 173 for more information about the fathometer survey file 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 144 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 6 2 3 2 Fathometer Settings Select the Fathometer Settings menu item in the External menu to set the fathometer settings Par The Fathometer Settings dialog is displayed fe The dialog consists of two sections the Le Fathometer section and the Communication Port 000 section MID Fathometer ae y de The Fathometer section determines the lt fathometer input mode To select a mode place Bias the cursor on the corresponding radio button vou then press and release the left mouse button The selected radio button will now appear 28 marked and the previously selected radio button Figure 6 5 Fathometer Settings Dialog will be cleared Only one radio button may be
143. are is to display the sonar image on the screen Each time the sonar transducer pings emits an acoustic pulse the reflection data is recorded and displayed along a horizontal line on the display screen As the Newest Line towfish passes over the seafloor it is continuously pinging The seafloor image is built by drawing the reflection data line by line The 8 reflection data is recorded in a 1000 line image buffer This means 8 only the latest 1000 lines of the sonar record are viewable When B new sonar line is recorded it writes over the oldest sonar line Not all of the 1000 lines in the image buffer can be displayed on the screen at the same time However you may review all the lines in the image buffer by scrolling up down the screen with the scroll bar along the 3 right side of the data window Oldest Line The Sea Scan PC features an integrated plotter The Sea Scan plotter allows you to set search patterns and monitor swath coverage Cre aa while collecting the sonar data The Sea Scan plotter is working in the background always and may be displayed at anytime It floats on top of the data window containing the new incoming sonar data Once a feature is located the site may be marked on the Sea Scan plotter for future reference Details of the Sea Scan plotter and the plotter sonar image interaction are provided in the following chapters Figure 4 1 Image Buffer The Sea Scan PC features software cont
144. ata file MSTIFF format the message Read Markers from MSTIFF will be displayed As another example when a marker is added from the sonar image the message Add marker from image is displayed This section displays the most current action affecting the marker lists The message will remain in this section until another action updates the message Global Marker List This section displays information about the contents of the global marker list The total number of markers in the list is displayed Furthermore the number of markers added deleted and modified are also listed Finally the number of markers whose internal identification number has been changed are also listed A unique internal identification number is assigned to each marker automatically when it is created These numbers are assigned sequentially by the Sea Scan PC application Thus any number of markers from different Sea Scan PC sessions may have the same internal identification number In this situation it is necessary to change any duplicate internal identification numbers so that each marker in the global marker list still has a unique internal identification number This modification does not affect the integrity of the marker information Current File Marker List This section displays information about the contents of the current file marker list The same information as shown for the global marker list is displayed However the current file marker list only applies to the
145. ation header indicate the relative Scale not supported position of the print image for each page in a multiple Print Options B Fit to Page page print operation You may also print the images of be the current and survey plotters and a list of the markers 100 currently displayed in the plotter There is some lose of AE resolution when printing the image This is due to 4 Print Eile Infi 10 gray scale and resolution limitations of the printer Print Survey Plotter Print Marker List Print Statistics Number of Pages 3 Figure 5 30 Print Dialog 5 14 2 1 Sea Scan PC Image This section displays a condensed view of the image buffer for the currently opened data file The condensed view is displayed using the current display parameters for the data window The selected print image is outlined with a black rectangle Initially the entire image is selected as the print image 5 14 2 2 Printer Information The name of the default printer and the printer port are displayed in this section Currently you cannot set the default printer from within the Sea Scan PC Review program However the default printer may be set using the Printers control panel The Printers control panel may be accessed from the Control Panel 5 14 2 3 File Information This section displays the file information for the currently opened data file The complete filename
146. backlight with the color white 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 77 4 12 4 12 1 4 12 2 4 12 2 1 4 12 2 2 4 12 3 4 12 3 1 Length Measurement Overview The Sea Scan PC allows you to measure any feature in the sonar image data with the cursor The length is presented as a transverse vertical along the direction of the towfish an axial horizontal along the axis of the sonar beam and a total length The lengths are measured using the current length units The range and ping separation distance for each sonar record line are sufficient to accurately calculate the length of features in the sonar record Factors Affecting Length Measurement Apparent Speed Over Ground Measuring the transverse length is completely dependent on the apparent speed over ground SOG The apparent SOG determines the ping separation distance Typically the apparent SOG matches the true SOG In this situation the sonar image has a constant 1 1 aspect ratio since the ping separation distances are valid However if the apparent and true SOGs were not matched then the transverse length will not be accurate since the ping separation distance will not be accurate The extent of the error depends entirely on the extent of the error between the apparent SOG and the true SOG For example if the apparent SOG is set at 3 6 knots and the true SOG is 4 0 knots there is a 10 error Thus the ping separation distance
147. bar to start the towfish pinging Set the range to 10 meters and the apparent speed over ground to between 4 and 5 knots If necessary disable the speed over ground navigational input from the Sea Scan tool bar to set the system for manual speed over ground control The screen image should begin to scroll rapidly showing the initial ping in the middle of each sonar record line 3 Set both the left and right channel time gain compensation TGC controls to their maximum settings Refer to 621 for more information on adjusting the TGC settings 4 Place the tips of your fingers into the right or left transducer window Rub briskly Returns should be seen on the left and right channels of the sonar record lines Ensure the TGC controls the apparent speed over ground and the range have been set properly as described above 3 3 4 4 Towfish Safety Mechanism The tow cable connects to the towfish at the tow point the ballast center of the fish If the towfish is anchored on the bottom the safety mechanism 1 Towfish caught in debris is designed to shift the tow point towards the rear n sealloor bontom of the towfish The shear pin holding the towfish ee 2 Strain on tow cable causes yoke to the tow bar will release when stressed shear pin to release shifting beyond its holding limit of approximately 300 tow point to rear of Towfish pounds This shifts the tow point towards the rear 3 Tow cable lifts Towfish up and of
148. can PC Neptune Operation Troubleshooting and Maintenance 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Section 3 e Sonar Operation Sonar Operation 7 3 1 3 2 3 3 3 3 1 3 3 2 Sonar Operation Overview This section provides important procedures and tips for the safe operation of the Sea Scan PC To complement the manual we highly recommend the 189 and videos 189 listed in our Reference Lists 185 in the Appendix Basic Side Scan Sonar Operation The Sea Scan PC enables the operator to view wide tracts of the seafloor by insonifying along the swath width and recording the strength of the echoes from the sea bottom The towfish is towed just above the bottom of the seafloor The towfish continuously emits narrowly focused beams of sound perpendicular to the path of motion The sound pulses pass through the water but are reflected from the seafloor and objects such as wreck sites on the seafloor The control computer records the echo signal strengths as they return and then draws the entire sonar record line on the screen An image of the seafloor is built line by line as the sonar record line from each pulse of the sonar is returned and drawn on the screen Figure 3 1 Basic Side Scan Sonar Operation Setting Up The Sea Scan PC Overview The Sea Scan PC control computer may be set up anywhere on the survey ship However the control computer needs access t
149. cer from the null point of the survey vessel A negative and positive value for the Y distance sets the layback to the fore and aft respectively of the null point of the survey vessel The layback is measured in meters This field contains the year 2000 compliant date for the sonar data line that is associated with the marker If the marker does not have an associated sonar data line this field is blank to indicate the date as invalid Layback Latitude and Longitude These fields contain the latitude and longitude L L of the Target UTM sonar for the sonar data line associated with the marker The sonar is offset from the null point of the survey vessel by the layback These fields are blank if the layback is not enabled The latitude and longitude are written in a standard format as degrees and decimal minutes followed by an ASCII character designating the hemisphere There is not a comma between the degrees and decimal minutes For the hemisphere N S E and W represent north south east and west respectively These fields contain the UTM northings eastings and zone of the target associated with the marker There is a comma between the northings 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 170 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 7 1 3 3 7 1 4 7 1 4 1 7 1 4 2 eastings and zone entries Survey UTM These fields contain the UTM northings eastings and zone of the survey vessel for the sonar data lin
150. corded Select the Cycle Back button in the plotter tool bar to reset to the previous plotter boundary coordinates You can cycle back to any set of recorded boundary coordinates This is very useful for getting back to a boundary coordinates setting after multiple zooms and pans Whenever you change the active plotters boundary coordinates either by zooming Display Parameters The Sea Scan plotter s essential function is to display the navigational information It can enhance this information in three manners by displaying the estimated swath coverage based on the location heading or COG and range connecting the locations with lines and displaying the depth information as recorded by the external fathometer Please note that any new display parameters will not been saved automatically in the initialization file sspc ini To store the new parameters to disk you must either save them as described later in this section with the Save Settings button in the plotter toolbar or save them when prompted upon exiting the Sea Scan PC program 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 43 4 7 4 1 Draw Swath Select the Draw Swath check box to draw the estimated swath coverage on the plotter When selected the check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white This is an estimated swath coverage based on the range and the vessel s location and heading as provided by the external naviga
151. cursor anywhere in the condensed view of the sonar image Then double click the left mouse button without moving the cursor A black rectangle will outline the entire sonar image 3 Alternatively you may select a print image of any dimension Place the cursor on one corner of the section you would like to select Press the left mouse button and keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the mouse to the opposite corner of the section A black box will be drawn indicating the selected section as you move the mouse Upon releasing the left mouse 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 137 5 14 5 5 14 6 5 14 6 1 5 14 6 2 5 14 6 3 button a black rectangle is displayed about your selection to indicate the new print image Printing the Print Image Click the Print button to print the currently selected print image and plotter options You may click either the Print button in the Print dialog or the Print Preview dialog In either case a dialog is displayed so you can monitor the progress of the printing process This dialog displays the current status of the printing operation You can cancel the printing process at any time by clicking the Cancel button in this dialog Print Page Layout Each of the printed pages has a standard layout The file information header is always at the top of the printed page The printed image the current and survey plotters or the marker list will appear b
152. cy warning at startup This option enables the Multi frequency warning at startup Many of the older Sea Scan PC systems are not capable of multi frequency control If your interface board is not capable of multi frequency control a warning can be displayed at start up This warning indicates that an initial check of your system shows that the current Sea Scan PC interface board is not capable of multiple frequency control You can still use this version of the Sea Scan PC software but the frequency selection option will not be available You can disable this warning so that it will not appear each time you start up the Sea Scan PC application Prompt before save default settings This option displays the Sea Scan PC Save Settings dialog when you shutdown the Sea Scan PC application Disable this option if you want to have the current settings saved automatically However when enabled if any of the settings have changed you are asked if you would like to save the new settings in the initialization file when you exit the application A dialog is displayed that lists both the original and new settings Any settings that have been changed are highlighted in red You have the options of saving the current settings in the default initialization file sspc ini exiting the application without saving the settings and leaving the settings in sspc ini unchanged or canceling the command to exit and return to the application Selecting the Yes butt
153. d body of the shackle This will ensure bolt will not back out Both shackles should be safety tied The tow cable is now properly secured to the towfish Tow Cable Kellems Grip XQ Towfish J Safety Break away Mechanism Towfish Yoke 6 Brass Shear Pin S Figure 3 3 Terminal Hardware for Towfish 3 Prior to connecting it is recommended that WD40 be sprayed into both the towfish bulkhead connector and cable connector to remove any water or debris After applying the WD40 use air to blow out the excess Finally plug the tow cable connector into the mating towfish 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 12 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 connector on the back of the towfish and tighten the locking ring snugly Do not over tighten the locking ring WARNING Always check the towfish and tow cable connectors for water and never plug a dry connector into a wet connector To clean and dry the towfish connector Soak the connector distilled water or alcohol Blow the connector clear and dry with clean compressed air 3 3 4 3 Testing the Towfish Connection Before deploying the towfish into the water test the towfish connection 1 Make sure all the cables are connected and secured and then start the Sea Scan PC application Once the Sea Scan PC application has started select the Power button from the Sea Scan tool
154. de GTD Time Delays VTG SOG COG HDT Heading ZDA Time If the Navigation Input is set to MIL STD 1553 the Sea Scan PC will attempt to receive the navigational information from the MIL STD1553A B data bus COG Display If any of the NMEA 0183 sentences that provide Course Over Ground are enabled the COG Display section allows you to determine the COG display mode The COG display mode affects the numeric and graphical displays of the COG in the Sea Scan PC software This includes the information window Rng Bearing and Track Survey dialogs If True COG is enabled the ship is gray in the compass rosette display Otherwise the ship is dark blue if the Magnetic COG display mode is enabled Communication Port The Communication Port section displays the current serial port settings for the navigation input If at least one of the NMEA 0183 sentences in the Navigation Input section is enabled select the Comm 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 155 button to change the serial port settings See Setting Communications Port Settings more information on changing the serial port settings for an external device The NMEA 0183 Standard for Interfacing Marine Electronic Navigational Devices version 2 1 which was adopted by the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA on October 15 1995 recommends serial port parameters of 4800 8 1 for data transmission Time Out The Time Out section
155. de using the DPT sentence This proprietary DPT sentence is identical to the NMEA 0183 DPT sentence However the meaning of the fields in the sentence are revised to record the Sea Scan PC transducer altitude and depth The Water depth relative to the transducer records the altitude of the Sea Scan PC transducers In other words this field records the distance from the sea floor to the Sea Scan PC transducers The Offset distance from the transducer to the water line measures the depth of the Sea Scan PC transducers In other words this field records the distance from the water line to the Sea Scan PC transducers The proprietary DPT sentence is typically provided by an external source such as a submersible or ROV control system that knows the vehicle depth from a pressure sensor vehicle altitude from a down looking transducer and the relative positions of these sensors to the Sea Scan PC transducers Proprietary ODOM Digitrace The Sea Scan PC application recognizes the proprietary depth output of the ODOM Digitrace depth digitizer unit from Odom Hydrographic Systems The ODOM standard output data string transmitted with 8 data bits none parity and 1 stop bit contains 11 characters The depth is transmitted to the hundredths of units Proprietary Geometrics G 880 The Sea Scan PC application recognizes the proprietary depth output of the G 880 magnetometer from Geometrics Inc The G 880 provides a calibrated depth measurement in its dat
156. demark of Marine Sonic Technology Ltd The Product names mentioned in this manual are the trademarks or registered trademarks of their manufacturers Windows is a trademark of the Microsoft Corporation Contents Table of Contents Section 1 Getting Started 2 1 What Is The Sea Scan nee aA 2 2 How This Manual Is Organized ss 2 3 REP RO EE PER ET UE 3 Section 2 Equipment 5 Section 3 Sonar Operation 7 1 se a 7 2 Basic Side Scan Sonar Operation iinnensrenennnnnenennnennnnnnennnnnes 7 3 Setting Up The Sea Scan PC sesssseacesscesdecennsesensexeectecaceinctecsecsvsetcenceaveucesssussanaesccvecetssteanedteesenceedendetcesseucesdtucsbersutecrusesesuessebceseevsborvente Power Supply Requirements for the Sea Scan 7 Setting Up the Sea Scan PC Desktop System scescsscsscseesseeseeeseesseesenseneseneneeseeseeeseesenesensneesseeseeeseesenesensenes 8 Settting Up the Sea Scan Towfish ssssceecssseneceneeseensesneeseesnessneeneeensesseeseesnerseesneceneeenessarsneesnesnersnesners 9 Fin Ring Assembly Instructions seen 9 Attaching the Tow Cable to the 11 Testing the Towfish Connection 12 Towfish Safety Mechanism 12 Deploying the Towfish 12 Complete Sea Scan PC System 22 222222 ka reena naai e dahada fi dd 13 4 Se
157. dentified with a marker 6 7 3 2 Output Settings Select the Output Settings menu item in the External menu to set the output settings The Output Settings dialog is displayed eee The dialog consists of two sections the Output Information E section and the Communication Port section Communication Port COM2 4800 8 N 1 Figure 6 20 Output Settings Output Information The Output Information section allows you to select the various output options To enable an output option place the cursor on the corresponding check box then press and release the left mouse button A check mark will appear in the check box when the option is enabled The Send PCON message as described above is the only option currently available Communication Port The Communication Port section displays the current serial port settings for the Output device If the Send PCON message option is enabled select the Comm button to change the serial port settings See Setting Communications Port Settings 141 for more information on changing the serial port settings for an external device 6 7 3 3 Testing Serial Communication Output Overview 00 0000 022 NL00000 011 W 1A 00 0000 003 5 00000 017 719 You test the serial communications of the output device by selecting the Output Test Communications menu item from the External er menu This menu command displays a dialog that displays the serial port se
158. dentifier buttons You cannot select more than six dentifier buttons As soon as six dentifier buttons have been selected the rest of the buttons will appear dimmed In order to change your selection simply press a selected button a second time The button will now appear raised indicating it is not selected as one of the six dentifier buttons Save the selection of dentifier buttons by clicking the OK button or hitting Return The new selection of Identifier buttons is now valid and any time the Add or Edit Annotation dialog is displayed this newly selected list of dentifier buttons will be displayed Alternatively cancel the new selection of dentifier buttons by pressing the Cance button Any changes to the original selection of dentifier buttons will be ignored 4 14 5 3 Setting Custom Text There are six possible custom dentifier buttons Each of the six custom dentifier buttons has customizable text associated with the button This text is entered in the annotation comment when the associated custom dentifier button is pressed in either the Add or Edit Annotation dialogs To include custom text as an dentifier button option simply select one of the custom dentifier buttons as one of the six visible Identifier buttons Then type the custom text you would like associated with this custom Identifier button 4 15 Saving Data 4 15 1 Overview The sonar image data may be saved to disk The data filename and default directory are s
159. derive information for that pixel in the resulting image The pixel of interest at the center of the neighborhood has a new value determined by an algorithmic computation In other words each point in the sample image is considered in its mathematical relationship to its neighboring points A new value is calculated for every pixel in the image based on a computation involving the pixels itself and the neighborhood This type of computation allows you to accentuate trends such as lines in the data These filters are typically slower than the point operations since they need to consider the neighboring points for every point in the sample image The most typical area operation involves a convolution of the sample image with a filter kernel For these area operations the two dimensional filter kernel is included in the filter operation description Other area processes such as the median filter operation do not make use of a filter kernel and the convolution process In these cases a kernel description is obviously not included in the filter operation description 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 125 Low Pass Spatial Filters This set of filters removes the high frequency content of the image In other words they tend to blur the image since the low frequency changes are accentuated High Pass Spatial Filters This set of filters removes the low frequency content of the image They tend to sharpen
160. ding on the specific situation 3 Determine which slider is the Bottom slider The Bottom slider is the closest one to the source the transducer It is not necessarily always on the left or right since you may select an object from either side of the transducer It will be on the same side of the Height Measurement dialog as the transducer in the Geometry view section Place the cursor over the black box of the slider and press the left mouse button Keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the slider to the bottom reflection as seen in the A mode and B mode views As the slider is moved the geometry view and height calculation are continuously updated to reflect the new geometry 4 Then locate the Object slider The Object slider is always in the middle no matter the orientation of the other two sliders Place the cursor over the black box of the slider and press the left mouse button Keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the slider to the point on the object that is causing the shadow as seen in the A mode and B mode views As the slider is moved the geometry view and height calculation are continuously updated to reflect the new geometry 5 Finally locate the Shadow slider The Shadow slider is the furthest one from the source the transducer It is not necessarily always on the left or right since you may select an object from either side of the transducer It will be on the opposite side of the Height Measurement dialo
161. displayed informing you that a file is now being read into the Sea Scan PC Review program The dialog contains a thermometer that allows you to monitor the progress of the data reading process Information about the data file including a condensed image and the survey plotter is also displayed for your reference in the dialog 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 99 Preview Data File This command allows you to preview the sonar image and the survey plotter of a Sea Scan PC data file without having to actually open the data file You will be prompted by the Select SSPC Data File for PREVIEW dialog to select a valid Sea Scan PC data file Upon selection of a valid Sea Scan PC data file the Sea Scan PC Date File Preview dialog is displayed The dialog displays a summary of the file information such as the filename and directory the date it was stored and the resolution and compression modes A condensed image and the survey plotter are also displayed for your reference The beginning text of any annotations present in the sonar image is displayed also At this point you may either cancel the operation preview another data file or open the selected data file If you chose to select another data file the above process is repeated Save This command allows you to resave the currently opened data file The existing filename is used automatically thus the old data file is written over by the any chang
162. e changed at any time Save the new waypoint by clicking the OK button If any of the entries are invalid you will be alerted and remain in the Waypoint Entry dialog You will not be able to exit by clicking the OK button unless all the entries are valid If all the entries are valid the new waypoint is recorded and placed at the selected location The new number of waypoints is displayed in the status window and you are returned to the Sea Scan plotter Cancel the new waypoint by clicking the Cancel button The new waypoint is not recorded and you are returned to the Sea Scan plotter Enter Waypoint Information Latitude 37 24 2458 S nis Longitude 75 2 51 2 6 2 Description 100012 Easting 423415 99 Zone 185 x Enter Waypint Information Northing 4103461 00 Description 100012 Figure 4 17 Waypoint Entry Dialogs 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 51 4 7 5 8 Marker and Waypoint Delete Markers and waypoints may be removed from the Sea Scan plotter The Marker Delete and Waypoint Delete buttons perform the identical functions on markers and waypoints respectively Selecting the Marker Delete button will only delete markers red and purple squares Selecting the Waypoint Delete button will only delete waypoints green c
163. e Bottom slider in the active range of the sonar data line the range delay is included in the altitude measurement However when the range delay mode is set to swath offset the range delay is not considered to be compensating for the altitude Thus when positioning the Bottom slider in the active range of the sonar data line the range delay is not included in the altitude measurement 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 80 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 13 3 4 13 3 1 4 13 3 2 4 13 3 3 4 13 3 4 4 13 3 5 Height Measurement Dialog Overview The object height measurement is performed in the Height Measurement dialog You select an object and then define the geometry for the height calculation You can perform multiple calculations on the same sonar record line for objects that are stacked such as a smaller object sitting on top of a larger object Display Height Measurement Dialog Select the Height check box the Sea Scan tool bar to display the s g Height Measurement dialog The Height check box in the Sea Scan tool bar will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white The cursor will change to the line selection cursor Although typically the object is visible on many transverse lines select a single line that defines the object and the shadow well Place the cursor on this preferred line Then press and release the left mouse button without
164. e Sea Scan PC the new valid water depth is displayed 6 2 3 5 Target Identification Dialog Water Depth The External Information section of the Target External Information Identification dialog displays the surrounding water Water Depth 31 3m depth The water depth at the selected sonar data line Mag Gamma Unavail is written in the universal units of length and the surrounding water depth is displayed as topographic Figure 6 8 Water Depth Display with profile of the sea floor The location of the selected NMEA 0183 DPT Sentence sonar data line is indicated with a vertical red bar in the topographic profile This graphic is intended to provide a visual reference of the surrounding sea floor topography 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 146 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 If the altitude information is provided by the external External Information ss fathometer then the Sea Scan PC transducer altitude is Water Depth 31 3m also indicated on the topographic profile The altitude Mag Gamma Unavail relative to the water depth is drawn as a horizontal line the water column Furthermore the Bottom slider is 4 automatically set to the altitude for the selected sonar data line 6 2 3 6 Training Mode Simulated Data In training mode the Sea Scan PC software simulates the serial transmissions from the external fathometer The water depth and
165. e adjusted ambient field Plotter Magnetometer Markers The Sea Scan plotter sonar image data display and magnetometer strip chart are closely related When the navigational information is available the source of each magnetometer reading can be correlated with an associated position Thus any magnetic anomaly seen in the strip chart can be associated with both a swath line in the sonar image and a known position The estimated position calculation will take into account the layback of the magnetometer This is a powerful tool for marking site location The operator may scroll through the strip chart data display identify a magnetic feature or interest and then mark the estimated location of the magnetometer on the plotter Marking a Magnetic Feature mark feature the magnetometer strip chart place the Eso cursor at the feature in the strip chart Then double click the left mouse button by quickly pressing and releasing the left mouse button twice The information for the selected feature in the magnetometer strip chart record is logged in the marker list The selected feature is indicated in the magnetometer strip chart with a horizontal green line The location of the selected feature is marked on the Sea Scan plotter with a magnetometer marker if it is within the plotter boundary coordinates The magnetometer marker is a black M surrounded by a red box as shown to the left The combined
166. e associated with the marker There is a comma between the northings eastings and zone entries Layback UTM These fields contain the UTM northings eastings and zone of the sonar for the sonar data line associated with the marker There is a comma between the northings eastings and zone entries Sample Marker File The following is an example of a valid marker data file with a single marker Note that the Fields line and the Marker Information line are actually single lines in the mkr file however they have been divided into separate lines for display in this manual SeaScanPC WaypointsVersion 6 Y2KDate 20000902 Y2KTime 1454 Date Saturday September 02 2000 Time 00 24 14 EDT SysTime 217368802 Fields Type ID SysTime JD JT TgtSlantRng TgtCorrected Rng TgtHght TgtDesc TowfishLL TowfishAlt DataFile WaterDepth LaybackOn LaybackX LaybackY Y2KD LaybackLL TargetUTM TowfishUIM LaybackUTM 4 1 217379590 00245 1466 0000 024 S 00000 037 E 80 47 Est00001 0000 006 N 00000 006 E AutoSaveOFF 25 31 OFF 0 00 0 00 20000902 pers 9999955 73 166090 16 31M 11 07 166032 59 SIN 9 Survey File Overview By default the survey file uses the svy extension Although these are simple ASCII text files and would normally use the txt file name extension the use of this specific extension facilitates the search of Sea Scan PC survey files A survey file is created automatical
167. e feature on the sonar image The complete Sea Scan plotter sonar image interaction is detailed later in this chapter The Plotter button in the Sea Scan tool bar toggles the Sea Scan plotter on and off the screen When the Sea Scan plotter is visible it floats on top of the data window containing the new incoming sonar data Although the Sea Scan plotter cannot be resized it can be moved anywhere on the screen Plotter Layout The Sea Scan plotter window is a standard window Apart from the caption bar it consists of four sections the display window the information window the status window and the plotter tool oe ssssoum 10 00 000N 15 00 400 bar along the left side 2121 0 00 010N 0 00 010E 3 2kt 2134 4 LE Hale 10 00 0005 114 59 600W CURRENT Figure 4 11 Plotter Layout Plotter Display Window The plotter display window displays either the current or survey plotter grid Both the current and survey plotters are displayed in the single display window You may toggle between the two plotters using the Current and Survey buttons in the plotter tool bar The active plotter is indicated in the lower right corner of the display window The lower left Southwest corner and a longitudinal range define the plotter coordinate boundary The coordinates for the lower left southwest and upper right northeast corners are written at their respecti
168. e indicates the source directory This is the directory that was selected at the beginning of the group review process If the entire pathname cannot fit the directory information is truncated so only the drive letter and the last directory name appear on the line Current MST This line indicates the filename of the current MST data file Num MST This line indicates the both the number of the current filename and the total number of MST data files located in the source directory 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 134 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 14 5 14 1 GIF Destination Directory This line states the full pathname of the selected destination directory If the entire pathname cannot fit the directory information is truncated so only the drive letter and the last directory name appear on the line Latest GIF This line indicates the filename of the latest GIF image file that was generated by the group review process Num MST This line indicates the number of GIF image files that have been generated by the current group review process Advance Operation Press the Advance button to move to the next MST data file in the source directory The operator must manually advance to the next MST data file in the group review process This ensures that an image is not closed before the operator has had the opportunity to review the entire image file Scroll Speed Settings The automatic
169. e intervals The Time Gain Compensation and Signal Response component also displays the latest sonar record line in A mode This viewing mode provides a strong visual reference of the acoustic returns on a single sonar record line This bar chart view displays the acoustic return intensity in the vertical axis The vertical lines along the horizontal axis represent the intensity of the acoustic returns at the respective positions along the sonar record line In other words a short vertical line represents a low intensity acoustic return Likewise a long vertical line represents a high intensity acoustic return The vertical lines are drawn using the current color scale The color changes as the line becomes longer This color change as the intensity increases reflects the change in color that would be seen on the sonar record line in the data window A red dot is used to mark the top of the vertical line since some lines may not show up well at certain intensities against the gray background The A mode view of the signal response provides an accurate visual reference for the affect the TGC has on the raw signal Changes to any of the gain parameters in the active range can be monitored by watching the immediate effect on the signal response Range Based Gain Control The Range Based Gain Control section allows you to set the amount of gain at a specific range for either channel The gain value for the total possible range for the Sea Scan PC 0
170. e intervals for either channel as a group As opposed to the individual gain controls in the Range Interval Gain Control section which only affect the amount of gain for each specific range interval this set of buttons affect the amount of gain for all the range intervals There are certain situations where certain actions are invalid such as when the two channels are coupled and you cannot select the Automatic Gain button In these cases the invalid buttons are disabled so you cannot select an invalid action From left to right the Group Gain Control buttons are as follows Transfer to Left Select the Transfer to Left button to transfer the entire set of gain settings for the channel the right side of the gain window to the gain settings for the channel on the left side The gain settings for the channel on the left side are changed immediately and the TGC display is updated with the new gain settings 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 66 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Transfer to Right Select the Transfer to Right button to transfer the entire set of gain settings for the channel on the left side of the gain window to the gain settings for the channel on the right side The gain settings for the channel on the right side are changed immediately and the TGC display is updated with the new gain settings Select the Couple check box to couple the gain settings for the two channels When sel
171. e of the channels you have twice as many horizontal pixels on the screen with which to view the sonar image data Thus for any given range twice the axial resolution may be displayed on the screen since you are displaying only one instead of two channels Setting Channel Mode To set the channel mode press one of the buttons in the Channel Mode group in the Sea Scan tool bar For example to view only data on the left side press the Left Channel button The selected button will appear pressed down and backlight by the color white Frequency Mode Overview The Frequency Mode group in the Sea Scan tool bar consists of a HF button for the low frequency mode and one for the high frequency 1 mode Only one of the frequency mode buttons may be selected at one time The button for the currently active frequency mode will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white Depending on the operating requirements you may want to use either the low or high frequency transducers The low frequency transducers although providing a lower axial resolution will see further than the high frequency transducers Likewise although not able to see as far the high frequency transducers will provide very high resolution imaging capability at closer ranges Setting Frequency Mode To set the frequency mode press one of the buttons in the Frequency Mode group in the Sea Scan tool bar For example to use the high frequency transducers pres
172. e of the feature you would like to measure and press the left mouse button If you attempt to initiate the area measurement process on an invalid line a sonar record line that does not have any associated range information the process is aborted Keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the mouse along the edge of the feature you would like to measure A red outline is drawn to indicate the path of the mouse as it is moved to the final position When at the final position release the left mouse button A straight line is drawn from the final position to the initial position to close the outline around the object A message is displayed in the Area display section informing you the area is being measured Upon successfully calculating the area the measured area is displayed in the selected units of measurement The outlined region used for the area measurement is indicated on the sonar image with a red cross hatched pattern 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 130 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 The Sum Area button the Area Tool bar allows you to add additional regions to the existing base region used for the area measurement The process for outlining the region to be added to the base region is the same as described above for creating the base region itself Upon outlining the new region a message is displayed in the Area display section informing you the area is b
173. e right mouse button twice The location for the selected feature in the sonar record is logged in the marker list The location is marked on the Sea Scan plotter with a marker if it is within the plotter boundary coordinates The number of the marker is used to create the unique identifier string automatically The combined number of markers and waypoints is updated in the status window If the marker output option is enabled the contact message is sent to the external device 4 7 12 3 Marking a Feature Standard Method 1 Place the cursor at the feature in the sonar record 2 Double click the left mouse button quickly press and release the left mouse button twice 3 The feature has been identified as a target Before recording the target you will be prompted to enter more information about the marker The Target Identification dialog will appear The Target Identification dialog is an enhancement of the Height Measurement dialog however the Target Identification dialog displays more information about the target See Height Measurement Dialog 801 for more information about the Height Measurement dialog In addition to the A mode B mode Geometry view and Transducer Information as shown in the Height Measurement dialog the Target Identification dialog displays Orientation External Information Navigation Information and Target Information You can also enter a Name for the marker The Orientation section displays the orientation of t
174. e selected thresholding limits are drawn in white on a dark gray background 4 Release the left mouse button to select the upper thresholding limit 6 bit Once a set of thresholding limits have been selected the color look up table is Image remapped The color look up table is modified to indicate the current thresholding limits The 8 bit sonar data is then remapped using the new color look up table and redisplayed in the zoom image section All pixels with an Pann intensity value less than the lower thresholding limit are remapped to an intensity of 0 minimum pixel intensity All pixels with an intensity value greater than the upper thresholding limit are remapped to an intensity of 63 maximum pixel intensity All pixels with an intensity value within the thresholding limits are remapped such that the range of intensities within the thresholding limits are stretched to fill the entire range of possible intensity values The pixel intensity histogram is recalculated to indicate the proper distribution for the new zoom image that has undergone the new color look up table transformation Select the Reset CLUT button to reset the color look up table to the default transformation Any selective thresholding of the original pixel intensity histogram will be cancelled and the zoom image will be returned to the original state 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 62 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5
175. ea Scan PC Review application that rely on information recorded in the sonar data files are not available A dialog will appear that lists data file version and its incompatibility with the Sea Scan PC Review application Figure 5 7 Development File Version Warning Display marker transfer information _ If this option is enabled the Marker Transfer Information dialog is displayed when markers are transferred to the global marker list This occurs when a new data file that contains markers is loaded The Marker Transfer Information dialog displays the number of markers that are transferred from the file marker list to the global marker list Furthermore the number of marker identifiers that were changed is listed Disable this option if you are not concerned about the global marker list See Marker Lists 115 for more information about the file and global marker lists Transferring markers into GLOBAL marker list 17 markers in the FILE marker list 14 marker IDs were changed Figure 5 8 Marker Transfer Information Dialog Data Modification Alerts If any of these options are enabled and the corresponding item in the current data file has been modified you will be prompted to save the current data file when you exit the Sea Scan PC Review application or attempt to open a new data file If you do not save the current data file any changes you have made to the file will be lost Special Features The Special Features section
176. ea Scan plotter The SOG is used to set the ping rate of the transducers in order to maintain a constant 1 1 aspect ratio for the sonar image data automatically The COG is used to update the estimated swath coverage in the Sea Scan plotter With both the latitude longitude pair and the COG or heading the Sea Scan PC is able to correlate features in the sonar image with a valid latitude longitude position based on the axial distance from the transducers See Plotter 1 for more information about the use of the navigational information in the Sea Scan PC Furthermore the navigational information is automatically logged to the survey file Refer to Survey 917 for more information about the survey file 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 154 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 6 4 3 2 Navigation Settings Select the Navigation Settings menu item in the RER External menu to set the Navigation Input ca settings The Navigation Input Settings dialog is displayed The dialog consists of three sections iL 810 1583 the Navigation Input section the COG Display al eT section and the Communication Port section Magnetic 860901 Time Out seconds Time Since Last Valid Fix 10 Maximum Allowed for Interpolation 10 Plotter Swath Display Use COG trom RMC AMA or VTG sentence Default Use HDG fram HDT sentence Figure 6 14 Navigation Input Settings Dia
177. ead screwdriver to tighten the brass screws so they seat flush with the ring fin body 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sonar Operation 11 7 Picture shows ring fin properly installed 3 3 4 2 Attaching the Tow Cable to the Towfish Transducer Face Safety Mechanism Connector Figure 3 2 Towfish Components The tow cable must be secured to the towfish This is a relatively simple procedure however caution must be exercised to be sure the tow cable fastens securely to the towfish WARNING Do not attach or disconnect the tow cable when the sonar power is on This may result in damage to the towfish and or the interface board To turn the sonar power is off either e Close the Sea Scan PC program e Ensure that the Power button in the Sea Scan tool bar indicates that the power is off The Power button is gray when the power is off Alternatively the Power button in the Sea Scan tool bar is red when the power is on 1 Inspect the shear pin that attaches the towfish yoke to the towfish for wear Replace the shear pin as required The shear pin is a 6 x 1 5 RH brass machine screw 2 Loop the tow cable strain relief device the end loop of the safety mechanism cable and towfish yoke through the towfish shackle as illustrated below Tighten the shackle bolt Next safety tie the shackle To do this place a small tie wrap through hole in shackle bolt head an
178. ecorded When a filter operation is selected the aUI filter is listed in the filter sequence list and the filter sequence counter is incremented to reflect the number of filters in the sequence Select the Clear Filter Sequence button to clear the list at any time To stop recording filter operations select the Record check box again The Record check box will now appear raised to indicate that any selected filter operations will not be recorded A filter sequence can be reviewed by scrolling up and down the list using the vertical scroll bar to the right of the list A filter sequence remains available to be applied to the entire sonar image as long as it is displayed in the list Useful Filter Sequences The following filter sequences are useful for specific tasks The end effect on the sample image for the listed filter sequence is described and then the filter sequence itself is listed Each filter sequence assumes you are starting with the original sample image Sharpen the image Sharpen the image without increasing the noise The low pass features are subtracted from the original image This increases the relative high frequency content of the image without having to perform a high pass filter operation Low Pass Store Reset Subtract Sharpen the edge features Sharpen the edge features without losing the general image Add the resulting image from the omnidirectional Sobel edge detection operation and the original ima
179. ected the Couple check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white The gain controls for the two channels are now coupled With both channels coupled whenever the amount of gain for a specific range interval for one channel is adjusted the amount of gain for the corresponding range interval for the other channel is adjusted equivalently When the two channels are coupled you cannot use the Transfer to Left Transfer to Right and Automatic Gain buttons The gain settings for the two channels must be able to be adjusted independently of each other during the automatic gain process When the Couple check box is first pressed transferring the entire set of gain settings from one channel to the other first equalizes the gain settings for the two channels The Couple Direction Transfer buttons determines the direction of the transfer To uncouple the two channels simply select the Couple check box again The Couple check box will now appear raised and the gain settings for the two channels can be adjusted independently again Couple Direction Transfer When the Couple check box is first pressed the entire set of gain settings are transferred from one channel to the other in order to equalize the two channels Select the To Left button so the gain settings are transferred from the right side to the left side when the Couple button is selected The gain settings from the channel on the right side of the gain window will be transf
180. ection cursor 2 To zoom in an 80x80 pixel section center the cursor over the section you would like to zoom in on Then press and release the left mouse button without moving the cursor The selected section with the default 80 x 80 pixel dimension will appear centered in the zoom window The selected section may not extend past the physical edges of the sonar record In this case when selecting an object at the edge of the sonar image the zoomed edge is set to the physical edge and the selected image is off center in the zoom window 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 59 3 Alternatively you may select a section of any reasonable dimension maximum 160 x 200 The section to be zoomed does not have to be 80 x 80 pixels Place the cursor on one corner of the section you would like to zoom in on Press the left mouse button and keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the mouse to the opposite corner of the section A black box will be drawn indicating the selected section as you move the mouse If you have selected a section that is greater than the 160 x 200 maximum dimension the edges of the selected section will not be displayed in the zoom window The selection will be truncated around the edges 4 selected image is displayed in the zoom window It is at x2 the zoom scale of the image shown in the data window As stated previously new axial ho
181. ed The Track Survey dialog is also removed and you are returned to the Sea Scan plotter Track Survey Dialog Layout The Track Survey dialog is an extension of the Rng Bearing dialog Taek Saver ES Apart from the Range Bearing information it also contains sections for EU 0 Cross Track Error and Arrival Radius Arrival 20 5 XTE Rng 50 2 cross track error XTE is displayed directly below the compass sank Gita rosette The arrow indicates the survey vessel s position with respect to Start the XTE range If the vessel moves too far to port the port XTE alarm _ 2200 0005 bar will fill in with a dark red color Similarly if the vessel moves too far o uosoon oo 500E to starboard the starboard XTE alarm bar will fill in with a dark green Figure 4 15 Track color XTE range is set by the Ang edit control The pilot can Survey Dialog steer along the specified survey leg by monitoring the vessel s lateral location with respect to the cross track range The XTE is updated every time new information is available from the external navigational source The arrival radius as set by the Arrival edit control is a proximity alarm around the end waypoint When the vessel is within the arrival radius the survey leg is considered to be completed However the Track Survey dialog will continue to display Range Bearing information relative to the curre
182. ed Gain Control section are updated accordingly and the TGC display is updated also with the new gain settings Thus you can monitor the progress of the automatic gain process When the next 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 69 sonar record line is available the process is repeated Thus the Sea Scan PC must be powered on so consecutive incoming sonar record lines may be analyzed This process is repeated until the intensity of the background in the active range is close enough to the optimal level While attempting to set the gain settings automatically you will not be able to adjust the gain settings manually Sea Scan PC AutoGain Action If the process is having difficulty setting the gains properly it may prompt you for further action You may either cancel or continue the process or you may selectively accept the gain settings If you cancel the process the gain settings are reset to their initial values If you accept the gain settings as they are you will have to adjust the gain settings for the selectable ranges manually to complete the process By monitoring the process by watching the TGC and gain slider controls being continuously updated you should be able to determine which selectable range was causing the difficulties Alternatively the AutoGain Status dialog will accurately display which selectable range is not adjusting properly Alternatively you can adjust the Background
183. ed for water column removal Thus when measuring an object that is on both sides of the towfish the range delay is not considered since it is considered to be compensating for the towfish altitude However when the range delay mode is set to swath offset the range delay must be considered The range delay is not considered to be compensating for the altitude and is included in the calculation of the length of an object when it is on both sides of the towfish Ultimately it is easiest to measure the length of an object when it is completely on one side of the sonar record line In this situation the length calculation does not need to take into consideration the range delay Measuring Length Overview You can measure the length of any object on the screen using the cursor A Data Length dialog is used to display the transverse axial and total lengths 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 78 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 12 3 2 Displaying Data Length Dialog Select the Length check box in the Sea Scan tool bar to display the Data Length dialog Length check box in the Sea Scan tool bar will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white A small dialog appears that is used to display the transverse axial and total length If necessary move the dialog so the feature you would like to measure is completely visible The Data Length dialog consists of two sections the L
184. ed manually and edited at any time The annotations are marked on the sonar image with the annotation symbol The display of the annotation symbols may be toggled on and off The number of active annotations is displayed to the right of the Toggle Annotation Display check box All active annotations are written to the data file when the sonar data is saved Thus the annotations may be reviewed and edited in the Sea Scan PC Review application SJ o La Coal 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 83 4 14 2 Adding an Annotation 4 14 2 1 Overview An annotation may be placed anywhere on the sonar image If necessary scroll the sonar image so the feature of interest is visible If the Sea Scan PC power is on the image will continue to scroll throughout the annotation process An Add Annotation dialog is used to simplify the creation of the annotation comment 4 14 2 2 Display Add Annotation Dialog Select the Add Annotation button the Sea Scan tool bar to add an annotation to the sonar image Alternatively select the Annotations Add menu item from the Options menu The cursor will change to the annotation cursor Center the cursor over the desired location then press and release the left mouse button The Add Annotation dialog is displayed The dialog consists of three sections the Comment Shortcut buttons along the left side the Comment text and then the OK and Cancel buttons along
185. eing measured Upon successfully calculating the area the measured area is displayed in the selected units of measurement The region used for the area measurement which includes the base region and the newly outlined region is indicated on the sonar image with a red cross hatched pattern The Exclusive Or Area button in the Area Tool 4 bar allows you to add additional regions and remove overlapping regions to the existing base region used for the area measurement The process for outlining the region used to modify the base region is the same as described above for creating the base region itself Upon outlining the new region a message is displayed in the Area display section informing you the area is being measured successfully calculating the area the measured area is displayed in the selected units of measurement The region used for the area measurement which includes an exclusive or combination of the base region and the newly outlined region is indicated on the sonar image with a red cross hatched pattern The Subtract Area button in the Area Tool bar allows you to remove overlapping regions from the existing base region used for the area measurement The process for outlining the region used to modify the base region is the same as described above for creating the base region itself Upon outlining the new region a message is displayed in the Area display section
186. el intensity histogram to the right indicating the overall pixel intensity has been increased Minus F 4 Decrease the intensity of each pixel in the sample image four levels For example if a pixel value has a current value of 24 the pixel value is decreased to 20 This has the result of shifting the pixel intensity histogram to the left indicating the overall pixel intensity has been decreased Expand 1 25 1 5 1 75 2 0 F x Factor F Increase the intensity of each pixel in the sample image by the indicated factor For example if a pixel value has a current value of 24 and the Expand 1 5 filter operation is selected the pixel value is changed to 36 24 x 1 5 Average F S 2 F The filtered sample image and the image in the storage buffer are averaged together on a pixel by pixel basis This filter operation makes use of the image in the storage buffer Add F S F The filtered sample image and the image in the storage buffer are added together on a pixel by pixel basis This filter operation makes use of the image in the storage buffer Subtract F S The image stored in the storage buffer is subtracted from the filtered sample image on a pixel by pixel basis This filter operation makes use of the image in the storage buffer 5 8 4 4 Area Operations The following filter operations all work on an area or group basis The group of pixels around each point in the sample image the neighborhood is used to
187. eled however it is implied by the activation of the IP Address and Port entry boxes When the Off option is selected the IP Address and Port entry boxes will be inaccessible and is indicated by them being grayed out When the On option is selected you will be able to click in either of the entry boxes and type 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 164 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 The IP Address is the address of the computer Disable that will be receiving the collected data This typically is 4 numbers between 1 255 status separated by periods or dots You can find the Repair IP address of the receiving computer by right clicking on the network icon next to the clock on Change Windows Firewall settings the computer that will be receiving the data as Open Network Connections shown in the picture to the right This procedure x as shown is performed in Windows procedure for other operating systems will vary Local Area Connection Status Then choose the Status option General Support This will show the Local Area Connection Network Connection Status Status Connected window Next click on the Duration 07 53 14 Speed 100 0 Mbps Support tab This will display the Connection Status information This will nl Aven Connection Status show the IP Address that the computer is currently configured to This is the number you will type into the Sea Scan PC real
188. elow the file information header File Information Header If selected the file information header is at the top of the page We recommend that the file information be printed since icons in the file information header indicate the relative position of the print image for each page in a multiple page print operation The filename the date and time the data file was originally stored and the file version are displayed The scale indicates the magnification percentage used to print the selected print image The magnification percentage is selected in the Print Options section of the Print dialog The page number for each page and the total number of pages for a multiple page printing operation are written in the header also information for each printed page The left most icon the white rectangle represents the entire sonar image A light gray rectangle indicates the section of the entire sonar image that has been selected as the print image The right most icon the light gray rectangle represents the print image A black rectangle indicates the section of the print image that is actually printed on each specific page Thus for print options that require multiple pages the relative position of the different sections of the print image that are on different pages are indicated by this set of icons If the page is printing a section of the print image a set of icons on the far right side of the file information header provide important location
189. em time the number of milliseconds elapsed since Windows was started 7 1 4 2 4 Sample Survey File The following is an example of a valid survey log file Note that the Navigation and External Information lines are actually single lines in the svy file however they have been divided into separate lines for display in this manual SeaScanPC Survey FileVersion 9Y2K Date 20000902Y2KTime 1484 Date Saturday September 02 1998 Time 00 24 44 EDT SysTime 10170783 DataMode TRAININGTimeStamp SysTime Julian Y2K Navigation Position COG SOG SideScanParms Channel Range Frequency RangeDelay Power FathometerParms WaterDepth MagnetometerParms Reading MinMaxReading Operations DataStorage FileFormat Comma delimited STARTNAV 10171484 98245 1486 19980902 1486 0 00 001 N 0 00 001 E 45 0 3 2 Both 100 600 0 00 0N 25 94 10172583 98245 1488 19980902 1488 0 00 003 0 00 003 45 0 3 2 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Appendices 173 7 1 5 7 1 5 1 7 1 5 2 Both 00 600 0 00 0 24 81 10173682 98245 1491 19980902 1491 0 00 004 0 00 004 45 0 3 2 Both 00 600 0 00 0N 24 93 0174780 98245 1493 19980902 1493 0 00 005 N 0 00 005 E 45 0 3 2 Both 00 600 0 00 0N 25 06 10175826 98245 1495 19980902 1495 0 00 006 N 0 00 006 E 45 0 3 2 Both 00 600 0 00 0 25 18 0437522 98245 1521 19980902 1521 0 00 031 N 0 00 031 E 45 0 3 2 Both 00 600 0 00 0 23 34 5
190. en performed on the original data For example if the zoom scale is set at Zoom x4 then the original image from the data window has been magnified x4 The zoom scale is always incremented by a factor of two since the image is doubled each time you zoom in again with the Zoom In by Position and Zoom In buttons 4 8 3 7 1 Pixel Intensity Histogram and Color Look Up Table zoom image and the color look up table The relative height of each histogram bar represents the number of pixels in the active zoom image with the intensity related to the histogram bar position The left most histogram bar represents the number of pixels with an intensity of 0 no acoustic return The right most histogram bar represents the number of pixels with an intensity of 255 maximum acoustic return The histogram bars are scaled relative to the largest histogram bar However if one of the histogram bars dominates the histogram plot the bar is clipped and the remaining histogram bars are scaled with a more appropriate scaling factor 6 bit This section displays a histogram of the intensities of the pixels in the active The color look up table indicates the mapping transformation from the 8 bit sonar intensity data 0 255 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 61 to the 6 bit display data 0 63 The default color look up table is a straight ramp that maps the intensity data to the display data as a linear functio
191. en the SOG is available from the external source it is displayed in the information window It is also displayed in the information window of the Sea Scan plotter It is possible that an invalid SOG is read or the SOG is not available for an extended time more than 10 seconds In either case the invalid or nonexistent SOG is not processed or displayed The latest valid SOG will continue to be used to calculate the ping rate of the transducers When the next valid SOG is received by the Sea Scan PC the new valid SOG is displayed and used to set the new transducer ping rate When the SOG is consistently invalid for any reason it may be desirable to switch to manual SOG mode Press the Manual SOG button in the Sea Scan tool bar to stop looking for the SOG in the incoming transmissions The button will appear pressed down and backlight with the color red You must manually match the apparent speed with the vessel s actual speed to maintain a constant 1 1 aspect ratio for the sonar image Please refer to Speed 3 for more information Course Over Ground The course over ground COG is provided by the NMEA 0183 RMA RMC VTG sentences The COG is written in true degrees The COG from the external source is used to update the estimated swath coverage in the Sea Scan plotter A timestamp is logged for each COG enabling the Sea Scan PC to correlate each sonar record line with a heading Thus the Sea Scan PC with the L L is able to correlate
192. ength Tool bar along the left side and the length display section 4 12 3 3 Length Display The Length display section displays the axial transverse and total lengths in the current universal units The latest measurement remains displayed until the Data Length dialog is removed or Trans 938m another length measurement is made Total 30 39 Figure 440 Data Length Dialog 4 12 3 4 Length Toolbar The Length button in the Length Tool bar allows you to measure the length of a feature in the sonar image with the cursor 1 Select the Length button in the Length tool bar The cursor will change to the length measurement cursor 2 Center the cursor over one end of the feature you would like to measure and press the left mouse button If you attempt to initiate the length measurement process on an invalid line a sonar record line that does not have an associated length the process is aborted 3 Keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the mouse to the other end of the feature you would like to measure The axial and transverse lengths indicate the relative vertical and horizontal distances respectively of the cursor from the initial position as it is moved to the final position 4 When at the final position the other end of the feature you are measuring release the left mouse button The measured length will remain displayed until the Data Length dialog is removed or another length measuremen
193. entered in the File name field will be SSPC Data Fics tm CE automatically truncated to five characters Figure 4 48 Select Express Directory Select the new default directory and filename by clicking and Name Dialog the OK button or hitting Return You will be returned to the Express Save Settings dialog and the new default filename and directory will be entered in the fields To have Sea Scan PC automatically choose a Data Path simply check the Set Data path Automatically check box Save the new express save settings by clicking the OK button or hitting Return The new express save settings will now be used every time the sonar data is written to disk Alternatively cancel the new express save settings by pressing the Cancel button Any changes to the original express save settings will be ignored 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 88 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 15 3 4 15 4 4 15 5 4 15 5 1 4 15 5 2 Express Save Select the Express Save button in the Sea Scan toolbar to save the sonar image data The Express Save button allows you to save a Sea Scan PC mst data file very quickly Alternatively select the Save menu item from the File menu to save the data In either case a Sea Scan PC mst data file is named automatically and written to the default directory The data storage can be monitored with the Data Storage Status dialog Refer to Monitoring Data Storage for more informati
194. er operation place the cursor over the filter you would like to apply to the sample image Then press and release the left mouse button once You do not have to double click the mouse button to select the filter operation Filtered Low Pass 5 The name of the selected filter is written to the right side of HER TN Ga the filtered image title bar The filter is then applied to the sample image The filter operations are always applied to the sample image Thus a sequence of filters is successively applied to the sample image A thermometer is displayed to the left of the name allowing you to monitor the progress of the filter operation Upon completion of the filter operation the thermometer and name are removed from the filtered image title bar and the resulting filtered sample image is displayed If the option to record the selected filter is enabled the filter operation is added to the filter sequence Point Operations The following filter operations all work on a point basis In other words each point in the sample image is considered independently of its neighboring points These filters are typically quite fast since they do not need to consider the neighboring points for every point in the sample image The Reset and Undo operations are selected by clicking the respective buttons located below the filter selection list All other filter operations are selected by clicking on the corresponding name in the filter selection list T
195. er sampled The increased pulse rate will distort the sonar data image in the data window by 17 Features will appear slightly elongated in the transverse axis caused by the oversampling This option is not recommended for normal operations however it may be required for some NOAA surveys Show warning at startup This option enables a warning about the NOAA 69 a ares mage de Wibe comes oversampling requirement at startup As stated above eee you want to force data density ulses meter at the range the oversampling will slightly elongate features in the j data window You can disable this warning so that it will not appear each time you start up the Sea Scan Figure 4 6 NOAA Oversampling Warning PC application 4 4 Display Parameters 4 4 1 Overview The display parameters only affect the display of the sonar image data in the data window They do not affect the manner in which the data is collected and processed Any of the display parameters may be changed at any time during the operation of the Sea Scan PC application without affecting the data collection process Any changes to the display parameters are effective immediately 4 4 2 Color 4 4 2 1 Overview For every sample of the acoustic return from the seafloor the intensity is recorded as a value from 010 255 8 bits 0 indicates no return was detected in that particular sample and a value of 255 indicates
196. erred to the gain settings for the channel on the left side to equalize the two channels The To Left button will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white and the Right button will appear raised Only one direction transfer button may be pressed at any given time Likewise select the Right button so the gain settings are transferred from the left side to the right side when the Couple button is selected The gain settings from the channel on the left side of the gain window will be transferred to the gain settings for the channel on the right side to equalize the two channels The Aight button will now appear pressed down and backlight with the color white and the Left button will appear raised Channel Selection 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 67 of the two channels The actions initiated by the Group Gain Control buttons will only be applied to the gain settings for the channels on the left and right side if the respective channels are selected In other words the check boxes for the channels on the left and right side must be selected for a group action to be applied to their respective gain settings To select the channel on the left side of the gain window select the Left Channel check box The Left Channel check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white Similarly to select the channel on the right side of the gain wind
197. ertion point The Custom Text 7 button in the bottom right corner enters the text that has been associated with the Custom Text 1 button Please refer to Customize Annotation Shortcuts 851 for more information about setting the dentifier buttons and the custom annotation text 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 84 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 14 3 4 14 3 1 If the navigational information is available the location at which the annotation has Ee been attached will have associated latitude and longitude The Latitude Longitude button places the latitude and longitude of the location in the annotation comment The last group the Qualifier buttons is used to enter qualifying statements in the annotation comment When the Checkmark button at the left is pressed Good Image is entered at the insertion point in the annotation comment Alternatively when the X mark button at the right is pressed Poor Image is entered at the insertion point Editing and Removing an Annotation Overview An existing annotation may be edited or simply removed at any time If necessary scroll the sonar image so the desired annotation symbol is visible It may also be necessary to toggle on the display of the annotation symbols An Edit Annotation dialog which is essentially identical to the Add Annotation dialog is used to simplify the editing process The only difference between the t
198. es in the opened data file Save As This command allows you to save the currently opened data file with a new filename Alternatively you can save the sonar image as a TIFF file TIFF is a standard file format for images thus allowing the image to be read by most third party image processing applications and word processors You will be prompted to name the file and select a location Furthermore you can choose to remove the navigational information from the data file For more information on saving the data please refer to Saving Data 131 Print This command allows you to print the sonar image and the current and survey plotters A Sea Scan PC Print dialog will allow you to customize the printing options before the image is actually printed You may also preview the printed pages based on your selected printing options For more information on printing please refer to Printing Data 134 Exit This command exits the Sea Scan PC Review application and returns you to the Windows desktop 5 2 22 Options Menu The Options menu allows you to perform functions that are Options related to the display processing and storage of the sonar data Wane Annotations Range Marker 2 Settings gt Group Review Group Review Status File Information Line Information Markers Open This command displays a pop up menu of marker commands Save As This pop up menu allows you to read and write a mkr file You
199. es the display of the Group Review dialog This dialog displays the status information for the group review operation The group review operations are described in detail in Group Review 137 Sea Scan PC Data File Information File Information File Information This command displays the Sea Scan oT Data File Information dialog that lists the file information for the currently opened data file Compression None The complete filename the date and time Frequency Unknown the data file was originally stored the creator Modifications i application the version the leg ne resolution compression modes and Nav info deleted frequency are displayed Any modifications to the data file such as having been filtered are listed To remove the dialog select the Figure 5 2 Data File Information Dialog OK button or hit Return Sea 5 m EE Line Information 2 This command toggles the display of the Sea een Scan PC Line Information Gain dialog This dialog displays the acoustic intensity Figure 5 3 Line Information Dialog information in A mode corresponding gain values and the transducer frequency for the current line The cursor is used to select the current line The contents of the dialog are updated continuously as the cursor moves over the sonar image data RIGHT Channel LEFT Channel 5 2 2 3 Help
200. et automatically each time the Sea Scan PC is started A default directory is created in the SSPCDATA 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 86 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 directory of the active drive typically C or D based on the current date For example on October 14th a subdirectory called 14 will be created in the SSPCDATA directory and all data for that day is automatically stored in this directory This subdirectory name is also used as the default filename for all data files for that day When you save the image data a suffix is automatically added to the default filename and the data file is stored in the default directory The first suffix is numbered 000 and the suffix for each successive file is incremented by one For example for a base filename 14 successive files would be named 140CT000 MST 140CT001 MST 140CT002 MST etc If a filename such as 140CT000 MST already exists the next available suffix is used automatically existing data file will not be overwritten Saving the data to disk does not interrupt the data collection process While the data is stored to disk the Sea Scan will continue to collect incoming sonar a image data and navigational information in the Directory DASSPCDATA U3JUN background Once the data storage process is Resolution Full 1000 x 512 Compression Low completed the new navigational information and sonar ima
201. eters on either side of the towfish The 300 kHz towfish has a range of approximately 150 meters The 150 kHz towfish has a range of over 500 meters A wide setting will enable you to scan a large surface area of the seafloor The search range defines the search lane spacing and the range overlap Bottom terrain site characteristics such as size and composition and sonar record interpretation experience should be considered when setting the initial search swath width A large range will enable you to cover a large area in less time than it would using a shorter range However smaller features may be missed when the Sea Scan PC is set to a larger range 2 Start the search pattern You can monitor the progression of the search since the survey vessel s position and the estimated swath coverage are plotted on the Sea Scan plotter as described in Plotter 31 Sea Scan plotter may be placed such that the incoming data is not blocked from view thus allowing you to easily monitor the search pattern and the incoming data simultaneously 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 16 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 3 When a feature is identified in the sonar record the location should be marked If possible throw a buoy off the stern on the side of the ship the feature was identified Be aware that the buoy may drift in high currents Note that the line connecting the buoy and anchor should be long enough for t
202. etting the output data parameters refer to Data Storage Settings 581 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 132 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 12 2 1 Saving as Sea Scan PC Data File 5 12 3 5 13 5 13 1 5 13 2 Select the Save menu item in the File menu to resave the currently opened data file The existing filename is used alee automatically thus the old data file is written over by any faa changes that have been made to the opened data file The Et entire Sea Scan PC data file format is resaved thus any changes that have been made to the markers and waypoints List Files of Type Drives M Include Navigation the Sea Scan plotter will be updated also MSTIFF mat c wings Figure 5 27 Save Data File As Dialog Select the Save As menu item in the File menu to save the currently opened data file to a new data file The Save Data File As dialog will appear Set the List Files of Type list box to MSTIFF mst You will be prompted to name the file and select a location You can choose to remove the navigational information from the data file If the Include Navigation option is selected as indicated by a check mark the navigational information will be saved with the sonar image data If the Include Navigation option is not selected in which case the check mark is not present all traces of navigational information wi
203. external device of the latitude longitude of the contact as calculated by the Sea Scan PC PCON hhmmss ss xx xx XXXX XX XX Ill Ia III a hh lt CR gt lt LF gt where in order delimiter start of sentence PCON proprietary TALKER identifier and sentence formatter hhmmss ss UTC Time XX XX UTC Day 01 to 31 Month 01 to 12 XXXX UTC Year XX Local zone hours 00 to 13 hrs local timezone is the magnitude of hours plus the magnitude of minutes added with the sign of local zone hours to local time to obtain GMT Local zone is generally negative for east longitudes with local exceptions near the International Date Line XX Local zone minutes 00 to 59 contact latitude N S contact longitude E W delimiter end of data fields hh checksum 8 bit exclusive OR no start or stop bits of all characters in the sentence including delimiters between but not including the and the delimiters The hexadecimal value of the most significant and least significant 4 bits of the result is converted to two ASCII characters 0 9 A F for transmission lt CR gt lt LF gt carriage return line feed Hex 00 end of sentence 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 162 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 6 7 3 Sea Scan PC Software 6 7 3 1 Overview The contact information is broadcast to an external device after a contact in the sonar image has been i
204. file The 25AUG express save option is described in detail in Express Save 841 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 26 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 2 5 4 4 2 5 5 4 2 5 6 4 2 6 4 3 4 3 1 Modules This group of controls provides access to the modules The display of the Sea Scan plotter Sea Scan gain control and Sea Scan range delay windows are toggled with the Plotter Gain and Delay check boxes respectively The Zoom Length and Height buttons initiate the zoom length measurement and object height measurement processes respectively Each of the modules is described in detail in the following chapters Gain These controls allow you to quickly change the gain settings without EE having to open the gain dialog You can initiate the automatic gain i process and increment or decrement the entire set of gain settings The gain operation is described in detail Gain 627 Annotations These controls allow you to quickly change the annotations in the sonar E Pe image You can toggle the display of the annotation symbols in the sonar image add and edit annotations and monitor the number of annotations present in the current sonar image Each of these controls is duplicated in the Options menu The annotation options are described in detail in Annotations 82 Data Window The data window takes up most of the screen and is located to the right of the Sea Scan t
205. follows 47834 5 lt CR gt lt LF gt 47835 3 lt CR gt lt LF gt 47834 9 lt CR gt lt LF gt This simple ASCII sentence is typically provided by older magnetometers with limited on board processing 6 3 2 2 Geometrics G 866 Sea Scan PC application recognizes the serial output of the G 866 magnetometer from Geometrics Inc The G 866 provides the total magnetic field reading in tenths of gammas The Sea Scan PC converts the magnetic field reading to gammas 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 147 6 3 2 3 6 3 2 4 6 3 2 5 6 3 3 6 3 3 1 6 3 3 2 Geometrics G 880 The Sea Scan PC application recognizes the serial output of the G 880 magnetometer from Geometrics Inc Although the G 880 is capable of concatenating the readings from multiple magnetometers the Sea Scan PC is only capable of accepting the first reading NOTE The G 880 transmission rate must be set to no more than two readings per second The Sea Scan PC is not able to keep up with the geomagnetic readings from the G 880 at the faster data rates Please refer to the G 880 Magnetometer User s Manual for the recommended method to slow down the rate of the G 880 data transmissions J W Fisher Proton 4 The Sea Scan PC application recognizes the serial output of the Proton 4 magnetometer from J W Fishers The Proton 4 provides the total magnetic field reading in gammas and is read directly by Sea Scan PC Marine Mag
206. formation consists of GIF Pathname This line identifies the pathname of the GIF file and the filename MSTIFF filename This field identifies the filename of the Sea Scan PC data file from which the GIF was generated Feature Date Time These fields contain the date and time that the sonar image of the selected feature were collected The white arrows along the left right and bottom edges of the GIF image indicate the selected feature Feature Position These fields contain the latitude and longitude of the selected feature The white arrows along the left right and bottom edges of the GIF image indicate the selected feature Sample Auto GIF Information Log File The following is an example of a valid AutoGIF information log file Note that the lines are actually single lines the gifinfo txt file however they have been divided into separate lines for display in this manual Version 1 1 D SSPCDATA img00001 gif SAMPLE MST 20000917 12 23 28 00 00 012N 00 00 016W This is a sample image Running Sea Scan PC and Sea Scan Review in Windows XP Both Sea Scan PC and Sea Scan Review are capable of running in the Windows XP operating system environment Due to the advanced capabilities of this operation system there are some common difficulties that may occur when running Sea Scan PC or Sea Scan Review on them This section addresses the most common issues and provides explanations as well as a solution for solving the issue to allow fo
207. g com Trippe Mfg Co 500 North Orleans Street Chicago IL 60610 4188 312 329 1777 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 190 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 7 7 4 Organizations National Marine Electronics Association P O Box 3435 New Bern NC 28564 3435 919 638 2626 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Section 8 e Contact and Support Information 192 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Contact and Support Information For technical support please contact us using one of the methods listed below Phone 804 693 9602 Toll Free 800 447 4804 Website www marinesonic com Business Hours 8 00 AM to 5 00 PM EST Additional documentation can be found on our Sea Scan PC Documentation page which can be found by going to our web site and following the links Downloads gt Sea Scan PC gt Documents 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Section 9 e Revision History 194 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 9 Revision History Added contact information and details for the SeaSpy 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd
208. g of the transducer in the Geometry view section Place the cursor over the black box of the slider and press the left mouse button Keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the slider to the end of the shadow as seen in the A mode and B mode views The shadow will appear as low intensity returns Typically the end of the shadow can be seen when the acoustic intensities return to normal background levels As the slider is moved the geometry view and height calculation are continuously updated to reflect the new geometry 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 82 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 6 The height calculation process is completed The height and range of the object are displayed in the universal length units 4 13 4 2 Multiple Calculations 4 14 There are certain situations such as when there are multiple objects where a more complex height calculation is required In many situations drawing a simple diagram of the geometry of the towfish and the multiple objects will help determine the proper method to calculate the height of a specific object For example an object with a shadow may be sitting on top of a larger base object also with a shadow You cannot use the same transducer altitude as set by the Bottom slider for both calculations since the top object is offset from the seafloor by the height of the base object The height of the top object would be measured in the foll
209. g red and white lines appears along the right side of the sonar image Event markers may be placed in the sonar image automatically based on distance traveled or an external device may be used to trigger an event marker This chapter describes the event marker feature in the Sea Scan PC Figure 6 16 Event Marker 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 157 6 5 2 6 5 2 1 Event Trigger Sentence Standard Event Trigger Sentence A valid event trigger sentence is any ASCII sentence that contains the word EVENT The external device that provides the event trigger sentence may be another computer or a simple box that is capable of transmitting an ASCII event trigger sentence The Sea Scan PC polls the event marker communications port looking for the trigger sentence For example EVENTI lt CR gt lt LF gt is a valid trigger sentence The Sea Scan PC ignores the 7 in the sentence and only cues on the EVENT EVE lt CR gt lt LFs gt is not a valid trigger sentence since it does not contain the complete word EVENT 6 5 2 2 Numbered Event Trigger Sentence It is possible to include an identification number with the event trigger sentence The identification number is automatically included in the comment field of the event annotation To include an identification number in the event trigger sentence add the text A after the EVENT field where is the five digit identification number For example EVEN
210. ge data will be displayed If the user option is enabled a dialog is displayed while the data is being written to disk The dialog displays the name and directory of the new data file the resolution and compression mode and it contains a thermometer that allows you to monitor the progress of the data storage process Condensed images of the image buffer and the current and survey plotters are also displayed for your reference in the dialog Figure 4 46 Data File Save Dialog Saving the data to disk will write the contents of the image buffer using the currently selected resolution The settings for each line such as the range and range delay are stored with the sonar image data All the markers and waypoints from the Sea Scan plotter the latest navigational information packets that define the ship s track an image of the survey plotter and a preview image of the data are also written to the disk All the Sea Scan PC data files use the mst extension so they can be properly identified by the Sea Scan PC Review application Please refer to Sea Scan PC Files Image Data File 167 for the Sea Scan PC data file format The data files may be read by the Sea Scan PC Review application for further analysis and review 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 87 4 15 2 Setting Express Save Settings Select the Settings Express Save menu item in the Sa
211. ge together Store Sobel Add Sharpen the edge features without losing the general image Add the resulting image from the omnidirectional Laplace 3 edge enhancement operation and the original image together Store Laplace 3 Add Increase the contrast Increase the contrast in images that were recorded with the gain settings too low Expand the lower 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 127 end of the pixel intensities throughout the entire range of intensities available Contrast stretch the 6 bit Image Histogram Remove electrical noise The speckle caused by electrical interference in the sonar image may be removed This operation is more selective than the Median filter The Median filter performs essentially the same operation but it tends to blur the image more than necessary Spike 1 Remove acoustic noise The horizontal streaks caused by acoustic interference in the sonar image may be removed This operation is a more selective noise removing operation than the Spike 1 filter This noise removal operation works exclusively for horizontal streaks Spike 2 5 8 6 Filtering Entire Data File The Entire Image Filter dialog is displayed This dialog lists the filter operations in the recorded sequence from the top to the bottom There are a number of overhead operations listed also These operations are necessary for the smooth application of the filter sequence to the ent
212. get Slant Range associated with the marker The latitude and longitude are written in a standard format as degrees and decimal minutes followed by an ASCII character designating the hemisphere There is not a comma between the degrees and decimal minutes For the hemisphere N S E and W represent north south east and west respectively This field contains the slant range of the target associated with the marker in meters This field is blank to indicate the slant range as invalid 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Appendices 169 Target Corrected Range This field contains the corrected range in meters from the nadir of the Target Height Target Description swath to the target This field is blank to indicate the range as invalid This field contains the height of the target associated with the marker in meters This field is blank to indicate the height as invalid This field contains the description string for the marker The description string cannot be more than 32 characters Survey Latitude and Longitude These fields contain the latitude and longitude L L of the survey Towfish Altitude Data filename Water Depth Layback Enabled Layback X Lateral Layback Y Axial Y2K Date vessel for the sonar data line associated with the marker The latitude and longitude are written in a standard format as degrees and decimal minutes followed by an ASCII character designating the hemisphe
213. gs The controls in the tool bar also provide a visual cue of the current settings The data window displays the sonar image Details for the various image manipulation control features oops provided in the following chapters Figure 4 2 Sea Scan PC Screen Layout 4 2 2 Caption Bar The caption bar is along the top of the screen The name of the application and the current operating mode are displayed in the caption bar In normal operating mode the application name Sea Scan PC v1 6 is displayed In training mode TRAINING is displayed on either side of the application name In automatic dialog response mode the text AUTO DIALOG Response appears in the title also 4 2 3 Menu Bar The menu bar is located directly below the caption bar It contains the menus for use with the Sea Scan PC application 4 2 3 1 File Menu The File menu allows you to perform system functions that are not File directly related to viewing the sonar image Save This command allows you to save the current image data to disk using the Express Save method The file is named automatically based on the default file name and placed in the default directory The Express Save method is described in detail in Express 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 21 Exit This command exits the Sea Scan PC application and returns you to the Windows desktop 4 2 3 2 Options Menu The Options menu
214. he track points are stored in a limited buffer and continuously updated as new navigational information is received Only the track points contained in the buffer can be drawn using the new boundary coordinates If the survey plotter is active any action that changes the boundary coordinates may result in losing some recorded navigation information The survey plotter records all the navigational information that has occurred as an image As long as the boundary coordinates are not changed it can display the estimated swath coverage for an entire survey However if the boundary coordinates are changed it will not be able to redraw the estimated swath coverage for the track points that are no longer stored in the limited buffer Thus any action that changes the boundary coordinates and may result in losing some recorded navigation information for the survey plotter must be verified There are a variety of methods to change the coordinate boundary Please note that any new boundary coordinates will not been saved automatically in the initialization file sspc ini To store the new settings to disk you must save them when prompted upon exiting the Sea Scan PC program Manual Configuration Select the Manual Configuration button in the plotter tool bar to configure the active plotter boundary coordinates The Plotter Manual Configuration dialog is displayed Plotter Manual Configuration 1 Enter the location of the lower left southwest coo
215. he Cancel button to return to the application Sea Scan PC Review Save Settings x Setting Original New Data Direction DOWN UP Color Palette Brown Gray Custom Palette SAME Range Markers m OFF OFF Shortcut Annotations SAME Custom Annotations SAME User Options SAME Units MODIFIED Figure 5 5 Save Settings Dialog Global Marker List Alert The global marker list has been modified since it was last saved 8 markers have been added 17 marker IDs have been changed Do you want to save the global marker list before you exit Figure 5 6 Global Marker List Alert Warning 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 105 5 3 2 2 Runtime Options 5 3 2 3 5 3 2 4 Display warning for development file versions If this option is enabled you will be warned when you attempt to read in data files that were created using development versions of the Sea Scan PC Although the File Information The selected file RIVER MST is a development version Dev 2 Sea Scan PC data file The file will be converted to a standard format for viewing a result the Survey Plotter will not be valid the time correlation may not be valid cannot save to standard format 1 Cancel old data files can be read by the Sea Scan PC Review application they are incompatible with the current MSTIFF data format As a result certain features in the S
216. he Sea Scan PC software and are only logged for reference in the navigational information 6 4 2 6 1 Heading 6 4 2 7 6 4 3 6 4 3 1 In some specialized cases the actual heading of the transducers can be determined If this heading is different from the survey vessels course over ground the heading should be provided in the NMEA 0183 HDT sentence The heading is also provided by the MIL STD 1553 transmission In these cases the heading instead of the COG is used to update the estimated swath coverage and for all target position calculations along the estimated swath lines Time The NMEA 0183 ZDA sentence may be used to synchronize the internal clock of the Sea Scan PC computer with an external source When the NMEA 0183 ZDA sentence is received the internal clock of the Sea Scan PC is reset based on the new time and date Be sure that the time zone environment variable is set on the host operating system If the time zone environment variable is not set the computer s time may be set incorrectly For more information on setting the time zone environment variable please refer to Setting the Time 2 11 in the Appendices Sea Scan PC Software Overview The Sea Scan PC software makes extensive use of the navigational information provided by the external source The navigational information is seminal to the proper operation of the Sea Scan PC The latitude longitude pair is used to plot the survey vessel s current position on the S
217. he anchor to reach the bottom The buoy will serve as a visual marker for the pilot when trying to get back to the site for multiple passes as described later The location may also be marked on the Sea Scan plotter Following the directions outlined in Plotter Sonar Image Interaction 55 mark the feature location on the plotter The Sea Scan plotter and sonar record are closely related When the navigational information is available each sonar record line can be associated with a L L and swath coverage Thus any feature seen in the sonar record can be associated with a known L L position and location within the swath The L L position for the selected feature in the sonar record is logged in the marker list The location is marked on the Sea Scan plotter with a marker if it is within the plotter boundary Nonetheless the operator as a matter of good log keeping should write the site latitude and longitude position in a logbook 4 If the initial siting is a good record the operator may want to save the sonar record This is very useful in the post processing stage for site location record keeping If the site is marked on the plotter the marker location is saved with the sonar image record To save the data select either the Save As or the Save command from the File menu Please refer to Saving Data s for more details about saving the sonar data to disk 3 4 3 3 Site Feature Identification 3 5 Once the site location is found the opera
218. he following symbols for the filtered stored and original sample images are used to help describe the point operations Filtered sample image 5 image in the Storage buffer O Original sample image For example the Original sample image is placed in the Filtered sample image Reset 0 Reset the filtered sample image back to the original sample image Undo Undo the previous filter operation The undo operation only works on the latest operation You may undo the undo operation also Thus you may toggle between two filtered states with the Undo button If a filter operation has been recorded it is removed from the filter sequence Store F 5 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 124 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Store the current filtered sample image in a storage buffer The storage buffer is used in subsequent filter operations that combine two images such as the Add filter operation Get Store 5 F Retrieves the filtered sample image from the storage buffer This operation places the image that is stored in the storage buffer in the filtered sample image When the Sea Scan filter is initiated the original sample image is placed in the storage buffer Plus 4 Increase the intensity of each pixel in the sample image four levels For example if a pixel value has a current value of 24 the pixel value is increased to 28 This has the result of shifting the pix
219. he plotter maintains a private section in the initialization file for the plotter display parameters However you may maintain multiple initialization files for the Sea Scan PC Review plotter The display parameters be saved in an file and read from a valid ini file at any time This feature is useful to maintain a consistent and independent set of plotter display settings for multiple data files Select the Read Settings button in the plotter tool bar to read in a set of predetermined display settings from an initialization file You will be prompted by a dialog to select a valid initialization file for the plotter Upon selection of a valid initialization file the plotter display parameters will be reset to the selected parameters The new settings are effective immediately and the application does not have to stopped and restarted Select the Save Settings button in the plotter tool bar to save the current Plotter display settings to a inifile You will be prompted by a dialog to set a filename and a destination directory Upon selection of a valid filename and location the plotter display parameters will be written to the ini file This action does not change any of the existing parameters 5 6 7 Marker Lists The Sea Scan PC Review application maintains two marker lists the file marker list and the global marker list The file marker list is a temporary list that maintains the markers attached to each data 2011 Mar
220. he side scan operator must also coordinate navigating the ship with the ship s pilot A survey plan should be decided on between the pilot and the side scan computer operator before getting under way All three people must be in close communication when making turns Turning the boat slows down the towfish making it drop towards the bottom This may cause the towfish to hit the bottom Before starting the survey the side scan operator pilot and cable handler should go over the procedures for when the towfish is about to hit the bottom If the towfish is about to hit the bottom the cable can be pulled in or the ship can speed up Speeding up the boat increases the drag on the in water cable effectively lifting the towfish up However this will not work when a depressor is attached to the towfish In this case speeding up the boat will push the towfish down simply increasing the speed at which the towfish will hit the bottom Catching the towfish on the bottom Great care should be exercised to avoid catching the towfish on the bottom As suggested above the operator pilot and cable handler should be prepared to avoid such an incident If the towfish is caught on the bottom and if the safety mechanism should fail to free the towfish the tow cable will most likely break from the strain One is effectively using the tow cable as an anchor chain with the Sea Scan PC towfish as the anchor If the towfish catches on the bottom and the safety mechanism m
221. he survey vessel towfish swath line and target along the swath line This orientation is generated based on the navigational information range range delay and layback This orientation diagram is updated continuously as the bottom and object sliders are moved The External Information section displays the surrounding water depth as recorded from an external fathometer If a magnetometer is available the surrounding gamma readings are also displayed The marker location is indicated with a vertical red line 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 56 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Sea Scan PC Target Identification B Mode iii Transducer Information Frequency 600 kHz 100 Distances meters Range Delay Qu Depth 27 2m Height 1 81 Altitude 7 8m Range 31 86 2 4 External Information a 4 4 Water Depth 35 0m Mag Gamma 44517 4 Navigation Information Altitude 7 81 LatfLong 0 00 090 0 00 090 1 Layback On X 0 0m Y 30 0m SOG COG 3 2 kt 45 0 Name Target Information Lat Long 0 00 102N 0 00 078E Slant Range 32 4m Figure 4 18 Target Identification Dialog Feature 4 Set the three sliders to accurately define the marker location along the swath and the object height Furthermore enter a unique name to identify this target 5 Select the OK button to record this com
222. ictates the amount of the raw data written to disk The sonar image data the raw data consists of the 1000 line image buffer Each horizontal line in the image buffer contains 512 pixels for each channel Thus for each channel the raw data can be thought of as a 1000 vertical by 512 horizontal pixel image In Full resolution mode the entire 1000 x 512 pixel image for each channel is written to disk In Half Horiz mode a 1000 x 256 image for each channel the full vertical resolution and half of the horizontal resolution is written to disk Every other pixel along each horizontal line in the 1000 line image buffer is skipped when the data is written to disk In fact adjacent pixels are compared and the pixel with the highest intensity is written in place of the two adjacent pixels This ensures that no information in the raw data is lost This saves half of the storage space normally required for the full resolution image However you will lose half of your axial horizontal resolution in the stored data file Similarly in Ha f Vert mode a 500 x 512 image for each channel half of the vertical resolution and the full horizontal resolution is written to disk Every other vertical line in the 1000 line image buffer is skipped when the data is written to disk Similar to the Half Horiz mode this mode saves half of the storage space normally required for the full resolution image However you will lose half of your transverse vertical resolution
223. iday December 01 2000 Time 12 00 05 EST SysTime 311097 DataMode TRAINING TimeStamp SysTime Julian Y2K FileFormat Comma delimited 372558 00335 43267 20001201 43267 0000 038 00000 038 45448 00 372601 00335 43268 20001201 43268 0000 038 00000 038 45447 00 372711 00335 43268 20001201 43268 0000 038 N 00000 038 E 45446 00 372821 00335 43268 20001201 43268 0000 038 N 00000 038 E 45445 00 372931 00335 43268 20001201 43268 0000 038 N 00000 038 E 45444 00 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 176 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 7 1 7 7 1 7 1 7 1 7 2 7 1 7 3 7 2 7 2 1 Auto GIF Information Log File Overview The AutoGIF operation allows the operator to quickly generate a set of GIF files from a set of Sea Scan PC data files This ability allows the operator to quickly compile an image archive of features from asurvey The AutoGIF operation also allows the operator to georeference the feature in the GIF image and adds comments The georeference information and comments are compiled in the AutoGIF information log file Auto GIF Information Log File Format The AutoGIF information log file contains a header which contains the version information that helps identify the text file as a valid AutoGIF information log file Each subsequent line in the AutoGIF information log file contains the name of a GIF file and the corresponding information Each line of in
224. ide Likewise if the data direction is set to scroll up the left sonar channel is on the right side of the display and the right sonar channel is on the left side The gain controls on the right side of the gain window will adjust the gain settings for whichever channel is displayed on the right side of the gain window Similarly the gain controls on the left side of the gain window will adjust the gain settings for whichever channel is displayed on the left side of the gain window Color Coding A consistent color coding scheme is used to display the different sections of the possible sonar swath The gain controls allow you to adjust the gain over the total possible range of the Sea Scan PC from 0 to 1000 meters range Depending on your range setting the possible range will be a smaller portion of the total possible range For example with a range setting of 100 meters the possible range is 0 to 200 meters taking into account the maximum possible range delay The active range the range that is being looked at by the Sea Scan PC is anywhere in this possible range depending on the distance of the range delay Recall that the range delay setting can delay the active range a distance equal to the range setting itself For example at a 100 meter range and taking into account a possible range delay distance of another 100 meters the full possible range is 200 meters The total possible range is always displayed in dark gray The
225. ience and are invaluable guides to the safe operation of a side scan sonar This manual provides a short list of the 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sonar Operation 17 common considerations for the safe operation of your Sea Scan PC Anchor the inner end of the tow cable You must anchor the inner end of the tow cable If 8 mer End anchor you catch the towfish on the bottom the inner end sai ies anchor will carry the strain on the cable until the safety mechanism on the towfish reacts to free the towfish It is also possible to foul the towfish so badly that it Figure 3 7 Anchor Inner End of Tow cannot readily pull free even if the safety mechanism Cable is deployed In this situation the inner end anchor may save the computer from being pulled into the water Refer to the situation below concerning the danger of catching the towfish on the bottom Tow cable on afterdeck The entire crew should be aware of where the excess cable is deployed on the deck Whenever the towfish is in the water everyone should remain cautious of the cable Communication It is very important to keep open communication between the side scan computer operator cable handler and ship s pilot Everybody s role should be clearly defined before starting the operation The side scan operator and cable handler must work closely together to maintain the fish at the optimal towing altitude T
226. iew program If the current preview image corresponds with the currently loaded data file the Load Previous and Load Next buttons are enabled Click the Load Previous button to load the previous data file in the data set Similarly click the Load Next button to load the next data file in the data set The new data file is automatically read into the Sea Scan PC Review program 5 5 3 Opening a Data File Select the Open Data File menu item in the File menu to open a Sea Scan PC data file You will be prompted by the Open SSPC Data File dialog to select a valid Sea Scan PC data file Upon selection of a valid data file the file is read into the Sea Scan PC Review program 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 112 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 5 4 5 6 5 6 1 Reading a Data File Recall that the Sea Scan PC Review can only view one data file at a time Any information about the current data file is lost when a new m data file is read into the Sea Scan PC Review program If the current Directory DAMSTL SSDATA data file has been modified you will be alerted A dialog will be Sonar Data Left Channel displayed with a list of modifications You are prompted to either save Resolution Full 1000 x 512 the current data file with the new changes and then read the newly selected data file or to ignore the modifications and read the newly selected data file di
227. in the stored data file In Quarter mode a 500 x 256 image for each channel half of the vertical resolution and half of the horizontal resolution is written to disk Every other vertical line in the 1000 line image buffer and every other pixel along each of the horizontal lines are skipped when the data is written to disk This saves three quarters of the storage space normally required for the full resolution image However you will lose half of your axial horizontal resolution and half of your transverse vertical resolution in the stored data file NOTE It is recommended that the Full resolution mode be used at all times The lower resolution modes were originally offered at a time when massive storage space was not available on computers The operator could sacrifice resolution to maximize storage capability However given the massive storage capabilities currently available on modern computers the Full resolution mode should be used at all times 4 15 5 3 Monitoring Data Storage You may monitor the data storage by selecting the Status Boxes Data Storage menu item from the Options menu This menu command Last Filename toggles the display of the Data Storage Status dialog The dialog may sas Shasta be moved anywhere on the screen When the dialog is removed its Express Directory Filename Filename 07APR position is remembered for the next time the dialog is displayed The CASSPCDATA O7APR Data Storage Status dialog c
228. ine Sonic Technology Ltd 116 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 6 7 1 5 6 7 2 file The global marker list is a comprehensive list of all the markers that have been read each time the Sea Scan PC Review application is run The markers from mst data files and mkr marker files are automatically transferred to the global marker list The global marker list is a simple way to compile a complete marker list for a specific set of data files Monitoring Marker Lists You may monitor the marker lists by selecting the Markers Status menu Marke Information item from the Options menu This menu command toggles the display Change Marker parameters of the Marker Information dialog A check mark will appear next to the Global Marker List Markers Status menu item when the dialog is visible The dialog may be Total Number 21 moved anywhere on the screen When the dialog is removed its position is remembered for the next time it is displayed The Marker een Information dialog consists of three distinct sections the Current Action section the Global Marker List section and the Current File Marker List Es 4 section Num Added 1 Num Deleted 1 72 4 Current File Marker Lis Num Modified Num ID Changed Figure 5 15 Marker Information Status box Current Action The Current Action section displays the most current marker list action When markers are read from a new Sea Scan d
229. informing you the area is being measured Upon successfully calculating the area the measured area is displayed in the selected units of measurement The region used for the area measurement which consists of the newly outlined region subtracted from the existing pase region is indicated on the sonar image with a red cross hatched pattern x x gt i x x gt gt 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 131 5 11 Object Height Measurement It is possible to measure the height of a feature from the sonar image if there is g discernible shadow behind the feature Measuring the height of an object has typically been performed by defining the geometry of the towfish the object and the object s shadow The Sea Scan PC has automated the object height measurement process The object height measurement feature is identical to its counterpart in the Sea Scan PC program Please refer to Object Height Measurement 7 for more detailed information 5 11 1 Annotations 5 12 Saving Data 5 12 1 Overview To reference a specific feature in the sonar image you may add an annotation The annotation feature allows you to attach a note on the sonar image much like one would attach a Post It pad note on a hard copy image The annotations may be removed and edited at any time The annotations are marked on the sonar image with the annotation symbol The display of the annotation
230. interface It will display the connection status as well as the number of the current data package that is being sent over the real time connection Notice in the example to the right that the status window indicates that the connection is NOT Connected Other possible phrases include Connected and Reconnecting 165 Real Time Status Connection Connected Packet 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Section 7 e Appendices Appendices 167 7 1 7 1 1 7 1 2 7 1 2 1 Appendices Sea Scan PC Files Introduction An Intel based computer with the Windows operating system has a multitude of uses only one of which is the Sea Scan PC display and control system The operating system must allow multiple file formats for all the different applications that operate on the computer Unlike Apple computers Windows does not have a rigorous file recording system to control the different types of files Thus all can do is use a specific extension mst for a data file and hope it does not clash with another application s default data file extension name MS DOS reserves some extension types such as for executables and for batch files Likewise Windows reserves some extensions such as for application extensions and 386 for virtual device drivers Many others are reserved by convention such as for standard text files for Word for
231. ions Test Log and OK buttons To remove the dialog select Fathometer Dialog the OK button or select the Fathometer Test Communications menu item from the External menu again to return to normal operation Device and Input Port Settings The external talker device and the input port settings are displayed in the caption of the nput section The Sea Scan PC can identify most types of talker devices Any unknown talker device will be identified by its NMEA 0183 talker mnemonic 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 145 Input The nput section displays the input sentences that were available in the latest block transmission from the external source Although other input sentences may be available only the sentences that the Sea Scan PC is interested in are listed For NMEA 0183 sentences the entire sentence strings minus the Start of Sentence and Talker ID characters are written to this group For MIL STD 1553 transmissions the raw data words are written in a waterfall display This allows you to check the validity of the sentence contents without the Sea Scan PC having to attempt to interpret the contents Log Select the Log button to record the incoming transmissions from the external device for debugging and analysis in a communications log file You will be prompted by the Select Communications Log File dialog to set a filename preferably with the c f extension and a destination d
232. ire sonar image and they require a certain amount of time to be performed also The Sea Scan filter must allocate the necessary buffers for the filter process transfer the raw image data from the image buffer and then initialize the buffers After the filter sequence has been applied to the entire sonar image the newly filtered image must be transferred back to the image buffer There is a thermometer for each item in the list so you can monitor the progress of each operation Select the Apply Filter Sequence button to apply the recorded filter sequence to the entire sonar image The Apply Filter Sequence button will appear pressed down and backlight by the color white The Entire Image Filter dialog is displayed This dialog lists the filter operations in the recorded sequence from the top to the bottom There are number of overhead operations listed also These operations are necessary for the smooth application of the filter sequence to the entire sonar image and they require a certain amount of time to be performed also The Sea Scan filter must allocate the necessary buffers for the filter process transfer the raw image data from the image buffer and then initialize the buffers After the filter sequence has been applied to the entire sonar image the newly filtered image must be transferred back to the image buffer There is a thermometer for each item in the list so you can monitor the progress of each operation Sea Scan PC E
233. irectory for the communications log file Upon selection of a valid filename and location the Sea Scan PC will place some header information in the file and then all subsequent incoming transmissions from the external device The raw information will be logged until you close the Serial Communications Test dialog and return to normal operations This communications log file is very useful for debugging difficulties with external devices 6 2 3 4 Fathometer Window The fathometer window displays the total water depth Select the Fathometer Fathometer Display menu item from the External menu to display the fathometer window This menu command toggles the display of the fathometer window A check mark will appear next to the Fathometer Display menu item in the External menu when the fathometer window is visible The window floats on top of the sonar Figure 6 7 Fathometer image and may be moved anywhere on the screen When the Window fathometer window is removed its position is remembered for the next time it is displayed This window displays the current water depth It is possible that an invalid value is read or the water depth information is not available for an extended time more than 10 seconds Dashes in place of the depth information indicate an invalid or nonexistent value If the water depth information is not available after an extended time the message No Data is displayed When the next valid water depth is received by th
234. kes use of navigational information from an external source An external source such as a GPS Global Positioning System receiver determines the current geographic position and calculates related navigational information such as speed and course over ground The external source continuously sends the navigational information over either a serial cable that is connected to a serial port of the Sea Scan PC computer or via a MIL STD 1553A B data bus The Sea Scan PC is informed when an incoming transmission arrives and then looks for the new navigational information The navigational information is processed for use by the Sea Scan PC application Navigational Information NMEA 0183 Sentences The NMEA 0183 Standard for Interfacing Marine Electronic Navigational Devices version 2 1 was adopted by the National Marine Electronics Association NMEA on October 15 1995 The NMEA 0183 protocol allows marine instruments to transmit and receive information via a serial cable This communication between a single talker and multiple listeners is based on a block transmission Blocks or groups of NMEA 0183 sentences are transmitted over the serial cable Each sentence has a header that uniquely identifies the ta ker and the information contained in the sentence An external GPS that supports the NMEA 0183 protocol continuously transmits at least the minimum implementation of sentences A serial cable connects the external GPS talker to a serial port of the Sea
235. ll Data Down button will cause the data to cascade down from the top The most recently collected data line is at the top of the image on the screen The left channel will appear on the left of the screen Alternatively the Towfish Down Scroll Data Up button will cause the data to scroll up from the bottom The most recently collected data line is at the bottom of the image on the screen The left channel will appear on the right of the screen The buttons for the data direction show the visual orientation of the towfish with respect to the data window When the data direction is set to scroll down the towfish will be visually pointed up Similarly when the data direction is set to scroll up the towfish will be visually pointed down The towfish direction is a quick visual cue to determine the orientation of the left and right channels on the screen Once the new data direction is selected the Sea Scan PC Review will regenerate the existing sonar image data for the new perspective in the data window If the image has been scrolled the scroll position will be maintained after the sonar image data has been regenerated The button for the selected data direction will appear pressed and the other data direction button will appear raised Only one data direction button may be pressed at any given time 5 4 2 Color Look Up Table The color look up table indicates the mapping transformation from the 8 bit 0 255 sonar data to the 6 bit
236. ll be removed from the sonar data file The navigation records markers annotations and the survey plotter image are removed Saving as TIFF Select the Save As menu item in the File menu to save the 1000 line image buffer of the currently opened data file as an uncompressed TIFF file The Save Data File As dialog will appear Set the List Files of Type list box to TIFF You will be prompted to name the and select a location The Sea Scan PC follows the Tag Image File Format TIFF Specification Revision 6 0 published by Adobe Systems Inc in 1992 TIFF v6 0 is a standard file format for images thus allowing the image buffer to be imported by most third party image processing applications You will be able to import the sonar image as a TIFF into most word processors also Group Review Overview This feature allows you to review a group of data such as the entire data set from a survey You automate the review process for all the data files in the group Furthermore you can create an organized set of GIF images of all the identified targets in the group Data File Groups A computer file system makes use of directories sometimes referre3d to as folders to organize the file structure For example a default directory based on the current date is created automatically by the Sea Scan PC application to store the data files for that day The file system allows you to store your data files in an organized and meaningful m
237. log Navigation Input The Navigation Input section determines which NMEA 0183 sentences are enabled by the Sea Scan PC To enable a specific input mode place the cursor on the corresponding radio button then press and release the left mouse button The selected radio button will now appear marked and the previously selected radio button will be cleared Only one radio button may be selected at any time If the Navigation Input is set to Off the Sea Scan PC will not process any incoming transmissions of the sentence In other words even if the external GPS transmits navigational information the sentence contents will not be processed If the Navigation Input is set to 0183 the sentence check boxes will be available for selection To enable an NMEA 0183 sentence place the cursor on the corresponding check box then press and release the left mouse button A check mark will appear in the check box when the sentence is enabled If a specific sentence is not enabled Sea Scan PC will not process any incoming transmissions of that specific sentence In other words even if the external GPS transmits the specific sentence the sentence contents will not be processed unless the sentence has been enabled Each NMEA 0183 sentence provides a different set of navigational information as follows RMC Latitude and Longitude SOG COG RMA Latitude and Longitude SOG COG Time Delays GGA Latitude and Longitude GLL Latitude and Longitu
238. lotter The preceding instructions apply to deleting waypoints however you must select the Delete Waypoint button The message Delete waypoints is written to the status window instead and only waypoints are deleted 4 7 5 9 Marker and Waypoint Save The markers and waypoints may be saved to disk Even markers and waypoints that are not visible within the plotter boundary coordinates are stored This feature allows you to store a series of commonly used waypoints Whenever the stored series of waypoints are required they may be read and displayed in the plotter as described in the next item description 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 52 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 14 Select the Marker and Waypoint Save button the plotter tool bar to save all the markers and waypoints in a waypoint data file The waypoint data file is named automatically and is placed in the current data directory A storage message such as Saved 140CT001 MKR is displayed in the status window Please refer to Marker Waypoint Data 1681 for more information about the waypoint data file format 4 7 5 10 Marker and Waypoint Read The markers and waypoints may be read from disk This feature allows you to display a set of waypoints that have been previously stored or typed into a properly formatted waypoint data file with a simple text editor Please refer to Marker Waypoint Data 168 for more information about
239. ly Any invalid entry such as alphanumeric text or blanks will not be allowed and the component value will not be updated The color square in the Custom Color Scale group and the color square displayed on the right side of the Selected Color group are updated to reflect the new RGB component values Likewise editing the number in the green and blue edit text boxes changes the green and blue component values respectively 5 Reset the entire custom color scale to its original settings by pressing the Reset button Any changes to the RGB component values for all of the 64 colors in the custom color scale will be cleared The original custom color scale will be redisplayed in the Custom Color Scale group 6 Save the new custom color scale setting by clicking the OK button The new custom color scale setting is recorded and the Sea Scan PC Custom Color Scale dialog is cleared from the screen The color scale in the information window and anywhere the sonar image data is displayed will change immediately to the newly defined custom color scale Cancel the new custom color scale setting by clicking the Cancel button The new custom color scale setting is not recorded and the Sea Scan PC Custom Color Scale dialog is cleared from the screen 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 33 4 4 3 Data Direction The sonar image data may scroll up or down the screen To set Display satin the dat
240. ly each time the Sea Scan PC application is started if the survey file option is enabled All of the subsequent external information and data storage activity is written to the survey As a result you will be able to completely recreate the survey based on the stored information Survey File Format The survey file a simple ASCII text file is a continuous log of all the incoming navigational information and also any data storage activity The current operational settings and other external inputs are recorded with the navigational input The survey file must differentiate between sections that contain navigational and other external information and sections that contain data storage information ASCII line delimiters frame each of the separate sections STARTNAV STOPNAV frame the navigational information STARTDATA and STOPDATA frame the data storage information The ASCII line EOF marks the end of the survey file The survey file contains three distinct sections the Header the Navigational and External Information and the Data Storage Information 7 1 4 2 1 Header The optional header helps the Sea Scan PC identify the data file as a valid survey file The exact string SeaScanPC SurveyFile must be present as the first line of the file The version is then listed The year 2000 compliant date time and computer system date time are written followed by the computer tick count system time The data mode which indicates whether the
241. m the Print Preview dialog without having to return to the Print dialog Otherwise press the Cancel button to remove the Print Preview dialog and return to the Print dialog Figure 5 31 Print Preview Dialog 5 14 4 Selecting a Custom Print Image As stated previously the current print image is outlined with a black rectangle in the condensed view of the sonar image By default the entire sonar image is selected as the print image However you may select any section of the sonar image to be printed There are three methods for selecting a section of the sonar image as the print image You can either select a print image with default dimensions select the entire sonar image as the print image or you can select a print image with any dimensions up to the size of the entire sonar image 1 select a print image with default dimensions center the cursor over the feature in the sonar image you would like to print Then press and release the left mouse button without moving the cursor The black rectangle will outline the new print image with default dimensions centered about the selected feature The selected print image may not extend past the physical edges of the sonar image In this case when selecting an object at the edge of the sonar image the print image edge is set to the sonar image edge and the selected feature is simply off center in the black selection rectangle 2 To select the entire sonar image as the print image place the
242. m window This allows for a more accurate measurement of smaller features since you can place the cursor more precisely at the beginning and end of the feature The zoom feature is essentially identical to its counterpart in the Sea Scan PC application Please refer to Figure 5 16 Zoom Window 581 for more detailed information However there have been a few additions to the zoom window in the Sea Scan PC Review application Sea Scan PC Zoom Location 35 06 054N 77 02 634W Comment Pair of crabpots Quick Zoom Selection Operation A quick zoom selection operation has been added to the Sea Scan PC Review To quick zoom on a section of the sonar image center the cursor over the section of the sonar image you would like to view in the zoom window Then double click the right mouse button without moving the cursor The selected section with the default dimension as set by the zoom settings will appear centered in the zoom window The selected section may not extend past the physical edges of the sonar record In this case when selecting an object at the edge of the sonar image the zoomed edge is set to the physical edge and the selected image is off center in the zoom window Zoom Settings Select the Settings Zoom menu item in the Options Zoom Settings Z menu to set the zoom settings The Zoom Options Window Dimension pixels dialog is displayed The di
243. matically The slider setting in the Group Review dialog determines the scroll speed The operator can advance to the next file in the group by clicking the Advance button in the Group Review dialog The group review operation is canceled by explicitly opening a data file The opening of a data file interrupts the automated group review process effectively canceling the operation 5 13 4 Group Review Dialog You may manage the group review operation by selecting the Group Review Status menu item from the Options menu This menu command toggles the display of the Group Review dialog The dialog may be moved anywhere on the screen When the dialog is removed its position is remembered for the next time the dialog is displayed The Group Review dialog consists of five Reviewing MST file MSTIFF Source Directory DAMSTL CAMEO Current MST 5 Num MST 3 of 6 MST files GIF Destination Settings Zoom distinct sections Action information MSTIFF Source settings GIF Destination settings Advance operation and scroll speed setting Action This section indicates the current action being performed by the group review process Directory D SSPCDATA GIF Lastest GIF IMG00001 GIF Num GIFs 2 Press the Advance button to avarice move to the next MSTIFF file Move slider to set scroll speed Figure 5 29 Group Review Dialog MSTIFF Source Settings Directory This lin
244. mation will be a non inverted straight ramp Contrast Stretching In addition to displaying the intensity distribution of the image the 6 bit image histogram can be used to apply a selective thresholding on the image This is also known as contrast stretching The contrast stretching operation remaps the color look up table based on the lower and upper thresholding limits selected by you from the histogram The purpose of this operation is to make better use of the full range of intensity values to display the image Low contrast images where most of the image is dark can be expanded into the full range of intensities Likewise with images that appear too bright the distribution of pixel intensities can be stretched to use the entire range of pixel intensities This operation will result more balanced image To select the thresholding limits Sea Scan PC Color Look Up Table x 1 Move the cursor to the lower thresholding limit in the 6 bit image histogram LUT 8 bit Data to 6 bit Image Figure 5 10 Color Look Up Table Threshold Selection 2 Press the left mouse button down The cursor will automatically move 16 pixel intensities to the right This is the minimum intensity value for the upper thresholding limit for the selected lower thresholding limit The histogram bars will be redrawn such that the intensity values in the selected thresholding limits are drawn in white on a dark gray backgro
245. mber of data bins with an intensity of 255 maximum acoustic return This histogram will always reflect the status of the raw sonar data You cannot apply a selective thresholding with this histogram The histogram bars are scaled relative to the largest histogram bar However if one histogram bar dominates the plot the bar for this data bin intensity is clipped and the remaining histogram bars are scaled with a more appropriate scaling factor 6 bit Image Histogram The 6 bit image histogram displays the intensities of the 6 bit image data after the look up table transformation from the 8 bit sonar data The relative height of each histogram bar represents the number of pixels in the sonar image with the intensity related to the histogram bar position The left most histogram bar represents the number of pixels with an intensity of O no acoustic return The right most histogram bar represents the number of pixels with an intensity of 63 maximum acoustic return This histogram will always reflect the status of the sonar image after the 8 bit raw sonar data has been transformed in to 6 bit image data by the color look up table transformation The histogram bars are scaled relative to the largest histogram bar However if one histogram bar dominates the histogram plot the bar for this pixel intensity is clipped and the remaining histogram bars are scaled with a more appropriate scaling factor Look Up Table LUT Sa The color look up table indica
246. me the dialog is displayed AutoGain Status dialog consists of three distinct sections Current Status Automatic Gain Settings and Gain Bin Status Bin 4 L Right Bin 7 Bin 8 Figure 4 31 AutoGain Status box Ok OO OO Oh Oh OF Current Status The Current Status section displays the current status of the automatic gain process The message Processing will appear while actively processing the sonar data The number represents the number of sonar data lines that have been processed Upon completion of the automatic gain process the message Shutdown hh mm ss will appear The hh mm ss represents the time the automatic gain process was shutdown This information is useful to determine when the next automatic gain process will occur when one of the timed intervals is active Automatic Gain Settings This section displays the current automatic gain settings See Automatic Gain Settings 691 for more information about the automatic gain Gain settings Gain Bin Status This section displays the status of the individual gain bins for each channel The status for each bin is 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 71 indicated with one of the following marks dash channel is not selected for the automatic gain process See Channel Selection 681 for more information about selecting channels for the Group Gain Control button
247. mmon at the operating depths and ranges of the Sea Scan PC However the second assumption of a level seafloor is typically not valid Thus you must compensate based on your knowledge of level of the seafloor The acoustic shadow for an object upslope of the transducer will be abnormally shortened Similarly the acoustic shadow for an object down slope of the transducer will be abnormally lengthened Range Delay The sampling for the sonar record line may be delayed up to a distance equal to the range by setting the range delay When a range delay has been set the image on the screen has been offset from the towfish Thus when measuring the height of an object that is on sonar lines that are offset in this manner the Sea Scan PC must consider the distance of the offset in the height calculation The offset must be considered in two separate manners depending on the range delay mode As described in 4 11 2 3 Range Delay Mode p 4 53 the range delay mode simply defines the manner in which the range delay is interpreted In either case it is best if the bottom is visible so the Bottom slider may be positioned accurately without having to make estimates based on the range delay mode When the range delay mode is set to range delay equals towfish altitude the range delay is considered to be the altitude of the towfish This interpretation of the range delay is used for water column removal Thus when positioning th
248. n In addition to displaying the intensity distribution of the zoom image the pixel intensity histogram can be used to apply a selective thresholding on the zoom image This is also known as contrast stretching The contrast stretching operation remaps the color look up table based on the lower and upper thresholding limits selected by you from the histogram The purpose of this operation is to make better use of the full range of intensity values to display the image Low contrast images where most of the image is dark can be expanded into the full range of intensities Likewise with images that appear too bright the distribution of pixel intensities can be stretched to use the entire range of pixel intensities This operation will result in more balanced image To select the thresholding limits 1 Move the cursor to the lower thresholding limit in the pixel intensity histogram 2 Press the left mouse button down The cursor will automatically 6 bit move 16 pixel intensities to the right This is the minimum intensity Image value for the upper thresholding limit for the selected lower thresholding limit The histogram bars will be redrawn such that the a intensity values in the selected thresholding limits are drawn in white a on a dark gray background 3 Keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the cursor to the upper thresholding limit The histogram bars are continuously updated such that the intensity values in th
249. n L Button for the left transducer only LF Button selects the low frequency in a dual frequency system Either LF or HF can be used with a single frequency towfish Color Scale Box selects the color scale Inv Button inverts the color scale Laybk Button displays the layback dialog Manual SOG Button selects Auto Manual Speed Over Ground Manually saves image on screen when selected Plotter Button displays the plotter Gain Button activates and displays the gain dialog Len Button activates the length tool Auto Button activates the auto gain mode Toggles On Off annotation symbol s on the image el ese i Bronze gt KID ore 0 Manual 50 lt AutoSAVE EE PE 51 Power Button Turns Power Off to towfish Increase Range Button L R Button for both transducers R Button for the right transducer only HF Button selects the high frequency in a dual frequency system Either LF or HF can be used with a single frequency towfish Custom Color Scale Button allows the creation of a custom color scale when active HOME Buiton returns the screen to the top of the image to view newest sonar data NOTE Increase Decrease Spd buttons are active when Manual SOG is depressed AutoSAVE mode selected indicator Zoom Button activates the zoom in tool Delay Button activates the
250. n PC application in detail It outlines the features and capabilities of the data acquisition software Section 5 Sea Scan PC Review Software s This section describes the Sea Scan PC Review application in detail It outlines the features and capabilities of the review software Section 6 External Devices 145 This section describes the optional external devices for the Sea Scan PC The interaction of the external devices with both the Sea Scan PC and Sea Scan PC Review applications are outlined Section 7 Appendices 167 The appendices provide additional information that is not essential to the normal operation of the Sea Scan PC but may be helpful and of interest to you The subjects include but are not limited to Sea Scan PC file formats Book References Windows XP issues Troubleshooting information etc Note In order to keep the size of the PRINTED Manual to minimum we have included references to other sections These references will have an icon next to them that includes a page number Simply refer to the page number that is inside of the icon to find the page that is referred to 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Getting Started 3 1 3 Introduction Welcome to the Sea Scan PC This section tells you what is included with the Sea Scan package It also provides installation instructions and suggests some quick start up tips If you are unfamiliar with operating a side scan sonar please read
251. n of the image displayed in the zoom window The cursor will change to the zoom selection cursor Center the cursor over the section in the zoom window you would like to zoom in on then press and release the left mouse button The selected section will be centered in the zoom window at twice the previous zoom scale The selected section may not extend past the physical edges of the previous image In this case when selecting an object at the edge of the previous image the zoomed edge is set to the physical edge and the selected image is off center in the zoom window The zoom scale will be updated to represent the new scaling 4 8 3 5 Zoom In Button Press the Zoom button to zoom in the previous image displayed in the zoom window The previous image will remain centered in the zoom window at twice the previous zoom scale The edges will be truncated in the new view The zoom scale will be updated to represent the new scaling 4 8 3 6 Zoom Out Button Press the Zoom Out button to zoom out the image in the zoom window The image Uk extents are increased in all directions automatically by a factor of two Thus the current image is centered in the new zoom image You cannot zoom out beyond the zoom factor at which the image was originally displayed in the zoom window The zoom scale will be updated to represent the new scaling 4 8 3 7 Zoom Scale Zoom 1 The Zoom Scale indicates the level of magnification that has be
252. ned in full detail Copyright 2006 MSTL 1 800 447 4804 The Sea Scan PC Review application allows you to review and process saved image files The image buffer is displayed on the screen in the same format as the Sea Scan PC display screen Most of the Sea Scan PC Review features such as the Sea Scan plotter and the plotter sonar image interaction are identical to the Sea Scan PC features The real time features for obvious reasons are not present in the Sea Scan PC Review program The Sea Scan PC Review application is started from the Windows desktop by double clicking on the Sea Scan PC Reviewicon Alternatively you may simply double click on a Sea Scan PC data file with the required mst extension name The Sea Scan PC Review program will be started automatically and loaded with the selected data file You may also take advantage of the Window s drag and drop capability Drag a valid Sea Scan PC data file onto the Sea Scan PC Review icon Upon releasing the mouse button the Sea Scan PC Review program will be started automatically and loaded with the selected data file The Sea Scan PC Review application may be configured with different display parameters These display parameters are saved in an initialization file ssreview ini The display parameters are displayed graphically in the Sea Scan tool bar and the information window Although each feature is described in detail in the following chapters the easiest method to learn the
253. nels is offset from directly below the towfish by the range delay distance To set the range delay mode select the corresponding button in E the Range Delay Mode Description section Only one range delay mode button may be pressed at any given time Select the Towfish Altitude button so the range delay is equal to the towfish altitude The Towfish Altitude button will appear pressed and the Swath Offset button will appear raised Select the Swath Offset button so the swath is offset by the range delay The Swath Offset button will now appear pressed and the Towfish Altitude button will appear raised In either case the diagram as described below is updated to reflect the new altitude mode setting Range Delay Altitude lt k gt Estimated Swath on Plotter Range Delay Offset N Estimated Swath on Plotter Figure 4 39 Range Delay Mode and Corresponding Plotter Interpretation 4 11 2 3 Diagram The direction of the towfish the swath coverage for selected channels and the range delay are displayed in a three dimensional view The diagram allows for all the possible perspectives due to channel selection data scrolling direction and range delay mode options The active range of the possible swath is highlighted in red 4 11 2 4 Displaying Range Delay Dialog Select the Range Delay check box in the Sea Scan tool bar to display the Range 25 Delay dialog Range Delay check box will appear pressed down and
254. nes Lines Since Save This line displays the number of sonar record lines that have been recorded since the last file was saved This number is incremented every time a sonar record line is processed and displayed Recall that the image buffer can contain the last 1000 lines thus when this value exceeds this upper limit of 1000 sonar record lines data that has not been saved is lost If the automatic save option is enabled the data will be stored to disk automatically when this number reaches 1000 minus the overlap Disk Space Avail This line displays the disk space in terms of bytes that is available on the default drive The default drive is the drive specified by the express save settings Num Files Avail This line displays the disk space that is available on the default drive in terms of the number of Sea Scan data files that can fit The approximate size of a full resolution data file is used to determine the number of files that can fit The default drive is the drive specified by the express save settings Num Files Saved This line displays the number of Sea Scan data files that have been saved since the Sea Scan PC application was last started Storage Parameters Resolution This line states the channel resolution mode used when saving the sonar data to disk The channel resolution is expressed as the number of vertical and then horizontal pixels for each sonar channel The Full Half Horiz Half Vert and Quarter resolu
255. netics SeaSPY The Sea Scan PC application recognizes the serial output of the SeaSPY and Explorer magnetometer from Marine Magnetics The SeaSPY and Explorer magnetometers provide the total magnetic field reading in gammas and is read directly by Sea Scan PC Sea Scan PC is capable of reading the Standard Compact and SIS 1000 compatible data formats This is handled automatically when Sea Scan PC is set to read SeaSPY data Sea Scan PC Software Overview The total geomagnetic field provides additional information about the survey operation The total geomagnetic field value is plotted on the Sea Scan magnetometer strip chart window Furthermore if the magnetometer parameters have been selected in the Survey File Options dialog the total geomagnetic field readings are logged to both the main survey file and a mag magnetometer survey file Refer to Magnetometer Survey File 171 for more information about the magnetometer survey file Magnetometer Settings The total geomagnetic field provides Magnetometer Settings additional information about the survey Magnetometer Scaling gamma operation The total geomagnetic field Of gt Proton 4 SeaSPY Red Data Blue Data fx value is plotted on the Sea Scan ASCII gt 866 880 9 gt magnetometer strip chart window Timing K Furthermore if the magnetometer Synchronize with sanar data parameters have been selected in the Communication Port Survey File Options dial
256. ng sonar data You may perform multiple zooms on the selected section and also measure features contained in the zoom window This allows for a more accurate measurement of smaller features since you can place the cursor more precisely at the beginning and end of the feature Each sonar record line is recorded at twice the horizontal screen resolution Thus there are twice as many horizontal pixels than can be displayed on the screen in the normal viewing mode Thus when the image is zoomed new information is displayed in the axial horizontal range The pixels in the normal viewing mode the data window not simply made chunkier to make the image larger in the zoom window The image in the zoom window is reconstructed from the raw sonar image data to display the full resolution of the sonar record lines However the lines are doubled in the transverse vertical axis to maintain the constant 1 1 aspect ratio for the zoomed image Selecting a Zoom Section There are two methods for selecting a section to be displayed in the zoom window You can either select a section with default dimensions 80 x 80 pixels or you can select a section with any dimensions up to the maximum size of 160 x 200 pixels 1 Select the Zoom check box in the Sea Scan tool bar to select a section of the sonar image to zoom The check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white The cursor will change to the zoom sel
257. ng that the Track Survey dialog is currently displaying survey navigational information Advancing to Next Leg in Survey 1 Upon arriving within the arrival radius of the end waypoint the Select next marker current survey leg is completed The cursor will change to the track mmm survey selection cursor again and the message Select next marker will appear in the status window 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 48 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 7 5 5 1 Place the cursor close to the desired end waypoint then press and release the left mouse button 1 The closest marker or waypoint is selected as the end waypoint of the new survey leg The end waypoint of the previous survey leg is automatically set as the start waypoint of the new survey leg The dark blue box is removed from the start waypoint of the previous leg and a dark blue box is drawn around the end waypoint of the new survey leg Furthermore the dotted line is now moved between the start and end waypoints of the new survey leg The contents of the Track Survey dialog are updated with the new information The status window is cleared of the Select next marker message and you are returned to the Sea Scan plotter 1 To end the track survey operation select the previous end waypoint when prompted to advance to the next survey leg The dark blue boxes are removed from the start and end waypoints and the dotted line is remov
258. nly edit the descriptor name of the marker using the marker rename feature However from the Sea Scan PC Review plotter you can select a marker using the marker rename feature and edit every aspect of the target identification information such as the slider positions that determine the target height and position along the sonar swath line You can only edit markers in this manner that correspond directly to the current data file In other words only markers that were previously created by selecting a feature in the current sonar image can be edited in this manner These markers are considered active markers Active markers that correspond directly to the current sonar image are displayed in the plotter with an enhanced marker icon a bright pink square with a black box around the outer edge Alternatively inactive markers that do not correspond directly to the current sonar image are displayed using the standard marker icon a dark pink square You can only edit the descriptor name of inactive markers that are displayed in the plotter with the standard marker icon 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 114 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Select the Target Edit button in the plotter tool bar The cursor will change to the target edit cursor As the cursor is moved in the plotter the attributes of the closest marker are displayed in the marker information window of the plotter The descriptor name and the marker
259. nt are displayed in the status window The most recent information remains in the status window until either another marker is selected or another action that makes use of the status window is selected Alternatively the status window may be cleared at any time by clicking in the window However the number of markers and waypoints in the plotter is always displayed 4 7 2 4 Plotter Tool Bar The plotter tool bar is located along the left side of the plotter window The plotter tool bar consists of a set of controls that allow you to instantly and easily access any of the plotter actions to change the various plotter parameters You can also quickly modify the display parameters The plotter tool bar controls may be divided into functional groups boundary coordinates display parameters markers and waypoints plotter operations active plotter selection and finally survey plotter operations 4 7 3 Setting Boundary Coordinates The Sea Scan plotter can plot the ship s position worldwide The lower left southwest corner and a longitudinal range define the plotter coordinate boundary The coordinates for the lower left southwest and upper right northeast corners are written at their respective corners in the display 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 40 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 7 3 1 window When the active plotter boundary coordinates are changed the track points must be redrawn T
260. nt end marker until the operator has updated the end marker The start and end waypoints are identified below the XTE bars The identifier string and location for both waypoints are displayed The start waypoint is listed first followed by the end waypoint If the identifier string of either waypoint is changed using the Marker Waypoint Rename button the identifier string in the Track Survey dialog is updated as well Marker and Waypoint Rename Fy Every marker and waypoint has an identifier string The identifier string is used to uniquely identify each of the markers and waypoints To change the identifier string for a specific marker or waypoint 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 49 1 Select the Marker Waypoint Rename button in the plotter tool bar Rip The cursor will change to the marker waypoint rename cursor and Rename marker will appear in the status window Rename marker 2 Place the cursor close to the desired marker or waypoint then press and release the left mouse button 3 The closest marker or waypoint is selected If there are many 00 markers and waypoints close together you may want to zoom in on Ola Maker Descrieri the group in order to select the correct marker or waypoint without any problems The Rename Marker dialog is displayed New Marker Description Description Target z Figure 4 16 Rename Marker Dialog
261. ntire Image Filter Filters Est Time Allocate Buffers Transfer Data Initialize Buffers Spike 1 Expand 1 5 Minus Minus Store Reset Average Transfer Data Total Time for Filter Operations 2 Figure 5 21 Entire Image Filter Dialog 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 128 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 9 5 10 5 10 1 5 10 2 5 10 2 1 5 10 3 5 10 3 1 Length Measurement Sea Scan PC Review allows you to measure any feature in the sonar image data with the cursor The length is presented as transverse vertical along the direction of the towfish an axial horizontal along the axis of the sonar beam and a total length The lengths are measured in real world units The range and ping separation distance for each sonar record line are sufficient to accurately calculate the length of features in the sonar record The length measurement feature is identical to its counterpart in the Sea Scan PC program Please refer to Length Measurement 7 for more detailed information Area Measurement Overview Sea Scan PC Review allows you to measure the area of any feature in the sonar image with the cursor The area measurement can be made in both the data and zoom windows The area measured in real world units is displayed in the universal units as set by the Units dialog The range and ping separation distance for each sonar record line are sufficient to
262. nttOl in E a 65 scroll Position Warning alii 68 Automatically 2 8 0 68 Automatic Gain davis 68 Automatic Gain Settings 69 Monitoring Autogain 70 10 0 CO RE 71 E SE E sien 71 Estimating Layback 72 Single PASS SE 72 Double Pass in Opposite 0 ss 73 Layback LOOKUP Chart sisi 73 73 Towfish Layback Dialog 74 Displaying Layback 74 S tting 74 1a P E 74 11 Range Delay 74 Ov rvieW
263. number of markers and waypoints is updated in the status window Removing a Magnetometer Marker The operator cannot remove a magnetometer marker as indicated by a horizontal green line from within the magnetometer strip chart The magnetometer marker must be removed from within the Sea Scan plotter Please refer to 4 7 5 8 Marker and Waypoint Delete p 4 29 for information on how to remove a marker from the Sea Scan plotter When a magnetometer marker is removed in the Sea Scan plotter the corresponding horizontal green line is removed from the magnetometer strip chart Target Identification Dialog Magnetometer Reading The External Information section of the Target Identification External Information Eze dialog displays the surrounding geomagnetic field readings Water Depth 41 The geomagnetic field reading at the selected sonar data Mag Gamma 45482 line is written in gammas and the surrounding geomagnetic Figure 6 13 Geomagnetic Field field is displayed in a normalized horizontal strip chart The Display location of the selected sonar data line is indicated with a vertical red bar in the strip chart This graphic is intended to provide a visual reference of the surrounding geomagnetic field 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 151 6 4 6 4 1 6 4 2 6 4 2 1 6 4 2 2 6 4 2 3 Navigation Overview This chapter describes how the Sea Scan PC obtains and ma
264. nuous scrolling list of the input sentences that have been received from the Remote system and the output sentences that have been sent from the Host Each input sentence received from the Remote is prefixed with gt Each output sentence sent from the Host is prefixed with H gt Log Select the Log button to record the incoming and outgoing serial transmissions for debugging and analysis in a communications log file You will be prompted by the Select Communications Log File dialog to set a filename preferably with the c f extension and a destination directory for the communications log file Upon selection of a valid filename and location the Sea Scan PC will place some header information in the file and then all subsequent incoming transmissions from the external device The raw information will be logged until you close the Serial Communications Test dialog and return to normal operations This communications log file is very useful for debugging difficulties with external devices 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 161 6 7 6 7 1 6 7 2 Output Overview This chapter describes the output feature in the Sea Scan PC software This feature allows you to send information about markers to an external device When you select an item in the sonar image data a proprietary sentence containing information about the selected contact is broadcast over the output serial connection PCON Output
265. o 120 VAC power the Sea Scan PC tow cable and any external devices for navigation or fathometer information Power Supply Requirements for the Sea Scan PC Typically the Sea Scan PC requires a 120 VAC 50 60 Hz power source If your survey vessel supplies this nominal line voltage use a three prong circuit tester to ensure it conforms to the National Electric Code for three wire line voltage WARNING Your survey ship s circuitry MUST have a properly grounded third wire Under no circumstances should the Sea Scan PC be used until the line voltage has been properly tested Alternatively the 120 VAC power may be derived from a frequency controlled inverter connected to a D C power supply such as the vessel s 12 volt DC system We have had excellent results with a 250 Watt or greater frequency controlled Tripp Lite inverter Trippe Mfg Co 500 Orleans St Chicago IL 60610 4188 312 329 1777 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 8 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 3 3 3 Setting Up the Sea Scan PC Desktop System The Sea Scan PC is a self contained side scan sonar system The Sea Scan PC software controls the collection of the sonar imagery and navigational input and displays the information for the operator on the computer screen There is no need for an external sonar interface device The towfish ping rate and sonar signal processing are performed by the interface card installed in the com
266. of all the markers and waypoints created during a survey automatically You cannot append to an existing marker file from within the Sea Scan PC program A unique filename is created every time a marker file is created Since the files are simple ASCII text files you can merge related marker files using a text editor However you must be certain the time correlation information is the same for both files This will be the case for two or more marker files that have been created if Windows has not been restarted in between 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 94 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 17 4 17 1 4 17 2 4 17 3 Training Mode Overview This chapter describes the training mode for the Sea Scan PC application The training mode is identical to the active mode except it does not collect real data nor does it accept information from any of the external devices The sonar record line data and the information from the external devices are simulated The training mode allows you to familiarize yourself with the basics of the Sea Scan PC without having to be actually collecting real data Every process including gain control and the testing of the serial communications is rigorously simulated The transducers and the external devices do not have to be connected Simulated Sonar Data In training mode the program simulates the sonar record data In an attempt to show movement over the seafloor
267. og the total Ambient Magnetic Field aecmagnetic field renting are logged to paar peut both the main survey file and a mag magnetometer survey file Refer to Magnetometer Survey File 174 for more information about the magnetometer survey file Figure 6 10 Magnetometer Settings Dialog Magnetometer The Magnetometer section determines the magnetometer input mode To select a mode place the 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 148 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 6 3 3 3 cursor on the corresponding radio button then press and release the left mouse button The selected radio button will now appear marked and the previously selected radio button will be cleared Only one radio button may be selected at any time If the magnetometer is Off the Sea Scan PC will not process any incoming transmissions from the magnetometer In other words even if the external device transmits a valid input sentence the sentence contents will not be processed unless the magnetometer has been enabled The sentence inputs are described in Geomagnetic 46 If any of these modes is selected the magnetometer is considered to be enabled The Sea Scan PC polls the incoming sentences looking for the total geomagnetic field reading Timing The Timing section is currently disabled The display geomagnetic field reading in the magnetometer strip chart is always synchronized with the sonar
268. olution mode Sea Scan Tool Bar The Sea Scan tool bar located on the left side of the screen The Sea Scan tool bar consists of a set of controls that allow you to instantly and easily change any of the display settings The controls in the Sea Scan tool bar also provide a visual cue of the current settings The controls may be divided into functional groups Display Parameters Modules Annotations and Preview Display Parameters This group of controls allows you to change the display parameters of Brown the sonar image data in the data window such as color scale and data scroll direction These display parameters are described in detail Display Parameters 29 The look up table parameters are described in Color Look Up Table Modules This group of controls provides access to the modules The display of the Sea Scan plotter is toggled with the Plotter check box The zoom filter length area and object height measurement processes are Len initiated by the Zoom Filter Length Area and Height buttons respectively Each of the modules is described in detail in the following chapters 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 103 5 2 4 3 Annotations These controls allow you to quickly change the annotations in the sonar image You can toggle the display of the annotation symbols place and edit annotations and monitor the number of annotations present in the current sonar
269. omputer end of the computer to tow cable handling system cable into the connector marked FISH on the interface board Or if you do not have a tow cable handling system plug the computer end of the tow cable into the connector on the interface board 3 Connect the GPS Connect the NMEA 0183 output cable of the external GPS into one of the serial ports of the computer 4 Secure all the system components and cables 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sonar Operation 9 The hardware system set up is complete You may now turn the computer on and start the Sea Scan PC applications 3 3 4 Settting Up the Sea Scan Towfish 3 3 4 1 Fin Ring Assembly Instructions 1 The first step in setting up the Sea Scan PC towfish is assembling the ring fin Each Sea Scan PC towfish comes with a ring fin assembly that is detached from the towfish for shipping 2 Slide the ring fin onto the towfish body 3 After placing the ring fin onto the towfish body align the threaded hole in the ring fin over the 1 4 inch hole in the towfish 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 10 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 This picture shows the threaded hole in the ring fin aligned with the 1 4 inch hole of the towfish 5 Carefully start by hand the 10 32NF X1 2 brass screws into the threaded hole of the ring fin BE VERY CAREFUL DO NOT CROSS THREAD 6 Use a small common h
270. on about monitoring the data storage Automatic Save You can store the sonar data to disk automatically Thus an entire survey can be stored without losing any information New data files using the express save settings will be created automatically based on the data storage settings If you enable the automatic save option it is highly recommended that you have enough disk space for the resulting amount of data files that will be stored Refer to Monitoring Data Storage s for more information about monitoring the data storage Data Storage Settings Overview The sonar data can be written to disk using a variety of channel resolution and compression modes The channel resolution mode dictates the amount of the raw data the 1000 line Image Buffer for each channel written to disk The compression mode dictates the level of compression the raw data undergoes when it is written to disk Typically the higher the channel resolution and compression the longer it takes to save the sonar data to disk As expected the lower the channel resolution and compression the faster it takes to save the data The sonar data can also be saved automatically with a user selectable overlap between the data files Setting Data Storage Parameters Select the Settings Data Storage menu item in the Options menu to set the data storage settings The Data Storage Save Settings fx Settings dialog is dis
271. on 1 0 5 the card will report itself as a Board ID 2 card You will have to enable the High Speed Ping Limit the High Speed Gain and the High Resolution Gain features in the SSPC INI file For those sonar system cards that were shipped with the Sea Scan PC Extended Gain EG the card will report itself as a Board ID 2 card You will have to enable the High Resolution Gain feature in the SSPC INI file Reference Lists This chapter lists a number of books videos products and organizations that have been referred to and or recommended in the text of the manual Books 1 Fish John P and H Arnold Carr Sound Underwater Images A Guide to the Generation and Interpretation of Side Scan Sonar Data ISBN 0936972149 2 Mazel Charles Side Scan Sonar Record Interpretation ISBN 0932146503 7 7 2 Videos 1 Not in the Manual Guide To Side Scan Sonar and Magnetometer Surveys 2 Sonar Operator s Not in the Manual Guide To Side Scan Sonar and Image Interpretation 7 7 3 Products Tripp Lite inverter American Underwater Search and Survey Ltd Box 768 B Cataumet MA 02534 508 564 6500 Peninsula Publishing 26666 Birch Hill Way Los Altos Hills California 94022 United States 650 948 251 1 http Awww sound acoustic books com Black Laser Learning P O Box 1385 Hockessin DE 19707 http www blacklaserlearning com Black Laser Learning P O Box 1385 Hockessin DE 19707 http www blacklaserlearnin
272. on is the only option that will recall the current settings automatically the next time you start the Sea Scan PC application User Settings Startup and Shutdown Options Show Multi Frequency warning at startup Prompt before save default settings Automatic Operation _ Respond automatically to dialog prompts The default response for all dialog boxes will be selected and all dialog operations are logged to the SSPCMSG TXT file Runtime Options Prompt and record transducer frequency Display status box when save data Set minimum pulse rate 1 pulse sec Force pulses meter at 100m range _ Show at startup Figure 4 3 User Settings Dialog System Check This version of Sea Scan PC requires multiple frequency interface board An initial check of your system shows that the current Sea Scan PC interface board is not capable of multiple frequency control You can still use this version of Sea Scan PC but the frequency selection option will not be available If you are having any difficulties please call the Marine Sonic Technology Hotline at 1 800 447 4804 or 1 804 693 9602 Figure 4 4 Multi Frequency Warning Sea Scan PC Save Settings Setting Original Data Direction UP Color Palette Gray Custom Palette External Devices Speed knots 4 3 Left Right Gain Units Frequency 300 Layback Range Delay Mode Altitude Range Delay 0 0m 0
273. on pressed down move the red bar to the desired amount of gain Then release the left mouse button When both channels are coupled the amount of gain is adjusted for both channels simultaneously As the red bar is moved the TGC curve as described above is continuously updated to reflect the new gain settings Likewise if the specific range interval is within the active range the signal response will show the immediate affect of the new gain setting on the incoming sonar signal 3 Alternatively simply place the cursor at the desired gain setting then press and release the left mouse button The gain will be moved to the new setting automatically There is a set of 8 gain controls for each channel The gain control at each selectable range for each channel is always displayed even if adjusting its level will not have an effect on the active range The color coding described above is used to represent the positions of the total possible possible and active ranges in each of the gain controls The set of gain controls on the right side of the gain window will adjust the gain settings for whichever channel is displayed on the right side of the gain window Similarly the set of gain controls on the left side of the gain window will adjust the gain settings for whichever channel is displayed on the left side of the gain window 4 9 3 5 Group Gain Control The Group Gain Control section allows you to set the amount of gain for the different rang
274. on will now appear marked and RE the previously selected radio button will be cleared Only Pings between process cycle one radio button may be selected at any time Background Signal Strength Target Maximum 35 Minimum 24 15 Figure 4 30 Automatic Gain Settings Dialog Interval The Interval section dictates how often the automatic gain process is automatically initiated In Manual mode the operator must initiate the process by pressing the AutoGain button in either the Sea Scan tool bar or the Group Gain Action section of the gain window In Continuous mode the automatic gain process is constantly active and adjusting the TGC curves based on the latest sonar data line Note 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 70 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 9 4 3 that this is only recommended for specialized operations and is not recommended for normal use Alternatively the automatic gain process may be initiated at timed intervals of 7 minute 2 minutes 5 minutes and 10 minutes These timed intervals are useful for unattended survey operations Background Signal Strength The Background Signal Strength section dictates the target intensity thresholds of the background level the automatic gain process is attempting to reach The automatic gain process will continue to adjust the TGC curves until the background strength for all the gain bins falls
275. ons and a resulting custom magnification factor 1 Select the Zoom In button in the plotter tool bar to select a section of the plotter to zoom The cursor will change to the plotter zoom selection cursor and Zoom In will appear in the status window Zoom in 2 To zoom in with a default magnification factor x2 center the plotter zoom selection cursor over the section you would like to zoom in on Then press and release the left mouse button without moving the cursor The active plotter boundary coordinates are reset to center the selected area but at twice the current magnification factor 3 Alternatively you may select a section of any dimension to be zoomed Place the cursor on one corner of the section you would like to zoom in on Press the left mouse button and keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the mouse to the opposite corner of the selection A black box will be drawn as you move the mouse indicating the selection The resulting selection must be the same aspect ratio as the plotter display window If you have made a selection that does not fit the display window properly the selection will be reoriented The horizontal or vertical dimension whichever is larger is maintained and the selection is centered in the other dimension Using this method you can zoom in on any section of the active plotter and are not restricted to x2 magnification factors 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd
276. onsists of four distinct sections Last Storage Stee Filename Express Save Settings Storage Status and Storage Tree SES D Parameters Disk Space Avail 2047 69Mb Num Files Avail 1837 Num Files Saved 1 Storage Parameters Resolution 1000 x 512 Figure 4 50 Data Storage Status dialog Last Filename This section displays the filename of the latest data file saved to disk A N A entry indicates that a data file has not been created yet 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 90 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Express Save Settings Filename This line states the default filename This is the same filename displayed to the right of the Express Save check box in the Sea Scan tool bar When the image data is saved using the express save option the filename is created automatically by adding a unique suffix to this default filename Pathname This line states the full pathname of the selected destination directory Typically the entire pathname cannot fit so only the drive letter and the last directory name appear on the line Storage Status Save Mode This line states whether the default save mode is Manual or Automatic In automatic mode the number of lines that trigger the save operation is appended to the mode indicator For example with a 25 line overlap the indicator is displayed as AUTO 975 This indicates that the automatic save operation will occur every 975 li
277. ool bar and below the information window The data window displays the sonar image data The window is always 512 pixels horizontally however depending on the screen resolution the number of vertical pixels may vary Typically not all of the lines in the image buffer can be displayed on the screen at the same time However you may view all of the image lines by scrolling up or down with the vertical scroll bar User Parameters Overview There are a number of parameters you can set to modify the user interface according to both your level of expertise and your operational requirements 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 27 4 3 2 Setting User Settings Select the Settings User menu item in the Options menu to set the user settings The User Settings dialog is displayed The dialog consists of three sections the Startup and Shutdown Options section Automatic Operation section and the Runtime Options section To enable an option place the cursor on the corresponding check box then press and release the left mouse button A check mark will appear in the check box when the option is enabled Save the new user settings by clicking the OK button or hitting Return The new user settings are effective immediately Alternatively cancel the new user settings by pressing the Cancel button Any changes to the original user settings will be ignored Startup and Shutdown Options Show Multi Frequen
278. oordinates are changed and the survey plotter boundary coordinates remain unchanged The only exception to this rule is the addition and removal of markers and waypoints Markers and waypoints are added to and removed from both plotters no matter which plotter is active 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 55 4 7 12 Plotter Sonar Image Interaction 4 7 12 1 Overview The Sea Scan plotter and sonar image are closely related When the navigational information is available the source of each sonar record line can be correlated with an associated position and heading Thus any feature seen in the sonar image can be associated with an estimated swath line and thus a known position along the swath line However there are situations such that the position may not be calculated from the available navigational information In this case you will be informed why Sea Scan PC is unable to determine a position by a message in the plotter status window This is a powerful tool for marking site location The operator may scroll through the sonar image identify a feature and then mark that 5 estimated location on the plotter The marker position may also be transmitted to an external device See 6 7 Output p 6 27 for more information 4 7 12 2 Marking a Feature Fast Method 1 Place the cursor at the feature in the sonar record 2 Double click the right mouse button quickly press and release th
279. oration 1990 Although TIFFs allow for customization of the format MSTL decided it was better to use the basic structure and create our own MSTL specific tags instead of trying to fit all of our proprietary information into the TIFF Please refer to the accompanying document titled MSTIFF MSTL Image Data File Format for more information about the MSTIFF 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 168 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 7 1 3 Marker Waypoint Data File 7 1 3 1 Overview By default the marker waypoint data file uses the mkr extension Although these are simple ASCII text files and would normally use the txt file name extension the use of this specific extension facilitates the search of Sea Scan PC marker waypoint data files by the Sea Scan plotter 7 1 3 2 Data File Format This data file is a simple ASCII text storage of the Plotter markers and waypoints The data file contains two distinct sections the Header and the Marker Information 7 1 3 2 1 Header The header helps the Sea Scan PC identify the data file as a valid marker waypoint data file The exact string SeaScanPC Waypoints must be present on the first line of the data file for the Sea Scan plotter to validate the text file The version is then listed The Year 2000 compliant date time and computer system date time are written followed by the computer tick count system time The marker information title fields are then written
280. orrect operation of the Win16 emulation in Windows Below is list of software titles that have been know to cause problems If you are having trouble getting your Sea Scan PC or Sea Scan Review installation to operate properly and you have one or more of these programs installed please uninstall the offending application s Software With Known Compatibility Issues e Embassy Trust Suite by Wave Systems 256 Colors In order to run Sea Scan PC or Sea Scan Review the operating system has to have its display set to 256 color mode Unlike the Windows 95 98 and Me versions of the Windows operating system Windows XP has hidden the 256 color mode option in the Display Properties 256 color mode has not been removed from the system however there are two different methods to set it Compatibility Settings 1 To ensure that the display mode is set to 256 colors when Sea Scan Sea Scan Review is run right click the Sea Scan PC or Sea Scan Review icon Click on the Properties menu This will display the the application s properties window Sea Scan Review 2 Click on the Compatibility tab This will display the Windows XP compatibility settings Click the Run in 256 Colors check box in the Display Settings section itn this program in compatibiliy mode for Display settings Run in 256 colors C Run in 640 480 screen resolution C Disable visual themes Input setting off adv
281. ow select the Right Channel check box The Right Channel check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white As an example assume the Left Channel check box is selected but the Right Channel check box is not selected If you then press the ncrement Gain button only the gain settings for the channel on the left side of the gain window will be incremented Since the channel on the right side is not selected the group gain action is not applied to its gain settings However you will still be able to change the gain settings for the channel on the right side using the individual gain slider controls in the Range Interval Gain Control section The selection state as set by these two check boxes only affects the application of the group gain actions These two check boxes allow you to selectively apply the group gain actions to either il In the event that neither channel is selected in other words both check boxes are selected you cannot perform of the group gain actions Reset Select the Reset button to reset the gain settings to default settings As discussed above this action is only applied to the channels that are selected The gain settings for the selected channels are changed immediately and the TGC display is updated with the new gain settings Automatic Gain Select the Automatic Gain button to set the gain settings automatically to optimal settings fo
282. owing manner 1 Measure the height of the object that is situated on the seafloor the base object Use the method outlined above for a single calculation 2 Record the height of the base object and the transducer altitude used for the calculation The height of the base object is the distance the first object is above the seafloor 3 Subtract the measured height of the base object from the transducer altitude to determine a valid transducer altitude for the height measurement of the top object Now move the Bottom slider back towards the source until the measured altitude as displayed on the screen is equal to the new valid transducer altitude you just calculated 4 Place the Object and Shadow sliders in the proper position for measuring the height of the top object as outlined above for a single calculation 5 The multiple height calculation process is completed The height and range of the top object is displayed in the universal length units Annotations 4 14 1 Overview To reference a specific feature in the sonar image you may add an annotation The annotation feature allows you to attach a note on the sonar image much like one would attach a Post It pad note on a hard copy image Any annotations attached to the sonar image move with the image Thus once the location at which the annotation has been attached has scrolled off the end of the image buffer the annotation disappears also The annotations may also be remov
283. pen edit box 3 Click the OK button 4 This will bring up the System Configuration Utility 5 Click on the Environment tab 6 Click the New button 7 Type in the Variable Name TZ 8 Type in the Varaible Value 272 where 222 is a required three character string with the name of the current time zone Ja d is a required field with an optionally signed number of one or two digits specifying the local time zone s difference from GMT in hours and is an optional three character field with the name of the local time zone during daylight savings time For example the following command sets the time zone to Pacific Time 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Appendices 183 Variable Name TZ Variable Value PST8PDT or for Greenwich Mean Time Variable Name TZ Variable Value GMTO 9 Click OK 10 Click the other OK button 11 You may have to restart the computer for the time zone variable to take affect 7 4 3 Windows XP 1 Right click on the My Computer icon This will bring up a pop up menu 2 Click on the properties menu item This will bring up the System Properties window 3 Click on the Advanced tab Then click on the Environment Variables button This will open the Environment variables window 4 Click on the New under System Variables section in the Environment Variables window 5 Type in the Variable Name TZ 6 Type in the Varaible Value 2zz Ja d fill
284. played The dialog consists of two sections RS nee the Automatic Save Settings section and the Channel Resolution Sonat Dare Line section select an option place the cursor the ee corresponding radio button then press and release the left Channel Resolution mouse button The selected radio button will now appear marked and the previously selected radio button will be cleared Half Ver 500x512 Only one radio button for each group may be selected at any Quarter 500 x 256 seu time Figure 4 49 Data Storage Settings Dialog Automatic Save Settings Enable the automatic save option by selecting the Save Data Automatically check box A check mark will appear in the check box when the option is enabled You can also set the amount of sonar data line overlap for each data file The overlap indicates the number of sonar data lines that are duplicated for each data file This feature is useful for traditional cut and paste mosaic techniques The overlap allows the data files to be pasted together more easily For more modern GIS based mosaics you do not want any overlap between the data files When the automatic save option is enabled a new data file using the Express Save parameters will be created for every successive 1000 lines of sonar data 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 89 minus the overlap Channel Resolution The channel resolution mode d
285. plete target information as a marker The complete target information for the selected feature in the sonar record is logged in the marker list The location is marked on the Sea Scan plotter with a marker if it is within the plotter boundary coordinates The combined number of markers and waypoints is updated in the status window If the marker output option is enabled the contact message is sent to the external device The Target Identification dialog is removed and you are returned to the normal Sea Scan PC operation Alternatively select the Cancel button to cancel the target identification The target information for the selected feature is not recorded as a marker The Target Identification dialog is removed and you are returned to the normal Sea Scan PC operation 4 7 12 4 Calculating Position for Marker Standard Calculation The latitude and longitude position of the feature in the sonar image is calculated from the navigational information When the navigational information is available the source of each sonar record line can be correlated with an associated L L position and COG Typically the exact L L location of the source is interpolated between two neighboring position fixes Using the interpolated L L position and the COG Sea Scan PC can orient the swath coverage for any sonar record line Thus any offset from the source along the length of the swath can be associated with a L L position also It follows then that any feature in
286. puter and controlled by the Sea Scan PC software The following provides a step by step description for setting up the Sea Scan PC hardware on a survey vessel 1 Setup the computer system with the following items in mind e Screen Glare Strong sunlight directly on the screen will result in poor screen visibility Place a hood over the monitor to minimize screen glare or cover windows to eliminate direct sunlight e Splash Protection Unless you have a waterproof or at least splash proof computer do not place the computer in an area that may become wet If you are working in a splash area place the components in a waterproof enclosure e Communication The sonar computer operator pilot and tow cable handler must be able to maintain clear and constant communication for the safe operation of the side scan sonar e Working Room The computer operator should allow enough room for the keyboard and mouse A hand held trackball is recommended when the space required for a mouse is not available e Stability The computer and monitor should be secured so they do not slide when the ship is underway or in heavy seas e Vibration If the work area is subject to shock and vibration then place the computer on shock absorbing material 2 Plug in the tow cable Do NOT plug or unplug the tow cable when the sonar power is on This may result in damage to the towfish and or the interface board If you have a tow cable handling system plug the c
287. r this object can be used to determine your layback in a single pass As the antenna passes by the object create a marker in the plotter at the vessels current location by double clicking with the right button on the newest sonar data line When the same object appears in the sonar image create a marker in the plotter by double clicking with the right button on the object The layback distance is the distance between the 43m 046 82 two navigation points as indicated by the two markers the plotter Be certain to measure from the sonar data line nadirs on which the Figure 4 33 Single Pass markers are located and not from the markers themselves Note that Layback Estimate this layback is only valid as long as the operational parameters such as Method towfish speed relative to the water and in water cable length do not change This method works best in areas of minor mass water flow Mass water flow due to tides and currents can significantly influence the layback 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 73 4 10 2 2 Double Pass in Opposite Directions 4 10 2 3 4 10 2 4 If you are fortunate to have a distinguishable underwater object this object can be used to determine your layback in double passes in opposite directions Moving in one of the directions of the proposed survey as the object appears in the sonar image create a marker in the plotter by double clicking with the right button on
288. r archive file is created when the MAG magnetometer survey file is selected This separate survey file is a continuous log of all the magnetometer information from the external magnetometer device See Magnetometer Survey 1741 for more information about the magnetometer survey file File Format An optional header can be included in the survey files The header contains information about the survey file that may be of interest See the relevant sections in Survey 1701 for more information about the individual survey file headers Either a comma or a tab character can separate the items on each line in the survey files Indicate the desired delimiter by selecting the corresponding radio button 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 93 4 16 1 3 1 Monitoring Survey File Select the Status Boxes Survey File menu item from the i Survey File Status Options menu to monitor the status of the survey files Survey File This menu command displays a Survey File Status dialog D 03Jun 03Jun003 svy that displays the survey files current parameters and Num Nav Records 7635 status To remove the Survey File Status dialog select DEEN AIEEE 0 the Status Boxes Survey File menu item from the Options Fathometer File menu again Each survey file section consists of two D3 03Jun 03Jun003 dpt sections Survey File Path and Survey File Information Num Records 7635 Magnetometer File 04 403
289. r proper operation of Sea Scan PC and Sea Scan Review on Windows XP Windows 16 bit Emulation Sea Scan PC and Sea Scan Review are known as Win16 applications These applications were originally written for use on Window 3 1 and variants Windows 3 1 is a 16 bit version of Windows hence the abbreviated name Win16 When Microsoft created Windows 95 it created a new operating system architecture known as Win32 because it is a 32 bit version of Windows The Win32 platform extends all the way to Windows XP and Windows 2000 Win16 programs are not directly compatible with Win32 operating systems In order for customers to 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Appendices 177 7 2 1 1 7 2 2 7 2 2 1 use their existing Win16 programs on Windows 95 Microsoft created a Win16 emulator This program provides the Win16 programs with the necessary environment to run in a Win32 operating system The Win16 emulator consists of two programs NTVDM EXE WOWEXEC EXE These two programs are used together to form the Win16 emulator Windows 16 Bit Emulation Problems As time goes by decisions are made to phase out Win16 compatibility This has been slowly happening with the introduction of new operating systems Marine Sonic Technology has been able to correct the Sea Scan PC and Sea Scan Review applications for all of Microsoft s Operating systems Occasionally other software companies create software that interferes with the c
290. r the current operating environment Please note that when this action is selected the gain settings are not adjusted continuously They are simply set to optimal settings and then control of the gain adjustment is returned to you While attempting to set the gain settings automatically you will not be able to adjust the gain settings manually The gain settings are set automatically based on the signal response and thus the process is not exact and may require some final adjustments upon completion As discussed above this action is only applied to the channels that are selected Refer to Setting Gain Automatically 81 for more detailed information about the automatic gain process Increment Select the Increment button to increment the entire set of gain settings The amount of gain for each range interval is increased by approximately three percent of its original value As discussed above this action is only applied to the channels that are selected The gain settings for the selected channels are changed immediately and the TGC display is updated with the new gain settings Decrement 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 68 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 a Select the Decrement button to decrement the entire set of gain settings The amount of gain for each range interval is decreased by approximately three percent of its original value As discussed above this action is only
291. raw echo returns at specific ranges time intervals Figure 4 23 Sonar Signal 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 63 4 9 2 4 9 3 4 9 3 1 4 9 3 2 Gain Sequence The transducer receives the acoustic signal that has been 91 roc am HH Dispi reflected from the seafloor and objects on the seafloor This acoustic signal mechanical energy is converted to an analog electrical signal by the transducer The raw analog signal is then gain adjusted based on the TGC curves set in the gain window for the two sonar channels The TGC adjusted analog signal is then digitized and displayed on a horizontal line in the data window Figure 424 Signal Processing Gain Window The gain window allows you to adjust the time gain compensation for both sonar channels either independently or in tandem Apart from the caption bar the gain window consists of the Time Gain Compensation Display and Signal Response section the Range Interval Gain Control section the Group Gain Control buttons and the Scroll Position m Warning section EA CS Home Figure 4 25 Gain Window Channel Orientation The current operating and display parameters are used to orient the channel display in the gain window For example if the data direction is set to scroll down the left sonar channel is on the left side of the display and the right sonar channel is on the right s
292. rch of Sea Scan PC magnetometer survey files A magnetometer survey file is created automatically each time the Sea Scan PC application is started if the magnetometer survey file feature is enabled All of the subsequent readings from the magnetometer are written to the file Asa result you will be able to completely recreate the magnetometer survey based on the stored information Magnetometer Survey File Format The magnetometer survey file a simple ASCII text file is a continuous log of all the incoming magnetometer readings The magnetometer survey file contains two distinct sections the Header 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Appendices 175 and the Magnetometer Readings Information 7 1 6 2 1 Header The optional header helps the Sea Scan PC identify the data file as a valid magnetometer survey file The exact string SeaScanPC MagnetometerFile must be present as the first line of the file The version is then listed The year 2000 compliant date time and computer system date time are written followed by the computer tick count system time The data mode which indicates whether the Sea Scan PC was in training or active mode is also written The header then displays the list of timestamps that are recorded in the survey file The timestamps options set in the Survey File Options dialog are used for all the survey files including the magnetometer survey file 7 1 6 2 2 Magnetometer Readings Information
293. rdinate by Enter Lower Left Lat Long and Range entering either the the latitude and longitude or UTM values in Latitude 712 lbs the appropriate text boxes For the Lat Long mode the Longitude 5 252 69 2 operator sets the hemisphere by clicking the appropriate button The current setting is indicated by the state of the two Xow buttons For example if the northern hemisphere is selected the North button will appear pressed down and backlight by the color white 2 Enter the longitudinal range by entering either the degrees Manual Cantautor minutes and decimal minutes values in Lat Long mode or LowerLeft UTM and Range range in meters in UTM mode in appropriate text boxes Northing 01798 29 Easting 415137 90 Range 16052 21 Figure 4 12 Plotter Manual Configuration Dialogs 3 Save the new plotter boundary coordinates by clicking the OK button If any of the entries are invalid you will be alerted and remain in the Plotter Manual Configuration dialog You will not be able to exit by clicking the OK button unless all the entries are valid If all the entries are valid the active plotter is set to the new boundary coordinates and you are returned to the Sea Scan plotter Cancel the new plotter boundary coordinates by clicking the Cancel button The active plotter is not set to the new boundar
294. re There is not a comma between the degrees and decimal minutes For the hemisphere N S E and W represent north south east and west respectively This field contains the altitude of the towfish for the sonar data line associated with the marker in meters This field is blank to indicate the altitude as invalid This field contains the pathname including the filename of the file that contains the sonar data for the marker This field is only valid if the Sea Scan PC was in automatic save mode If the automatic save feature was disabled the text AutoSaveOFF will be written in the field Furthermore if the marker is a waypoint that was entered manually by the operator the text ManualEntry will be written in the field This field contains the water depth for the sonar data line associated with the marker in meters This field is blank to indicate the depth as invalid This field indicates if a layback was enabled at the survey vessel position fix associated with the marker ON indicates that the layback was enabled OFF indicates that the layback was disabled even if a layback offset appears in the next two fields This field defines the lateral layback of the transducer from the null point of the survey vessel A negative and positive value for the X distance sets the layback to the left and right respectively of the null point of the survey vessel The layback is measured in meters This field defines the axial layback of the transdu
295. rectly Once a valid Sea Scan PC data file has been selected using either method described above a Sea Scan PC Data File Open dialog is displayed informing you that a file is now being read The dialog displays the name and directory the file version and the resolution and compression modes of the new data file It also contains a Figure 5 12 Data File thermometer that allows you to monitor the progress of the data Open Dialog reading process Condensed images of the image buffer and the survey plotter are displayed for your reference in the dialog Once the entire contents of the data file have been read the filename the flag indicating the presence of range delay in the sonar record and the resolution mode are written in the information window Then the sonar image is generated from the raw sonar record lines A dialog with a thermometer is displayed allowing you to monitor the progress of the procedure Once the sonar image has been generated the sonar image is displayed in the data window A preview image is displayed in the preview section of the tool bar The visible section of the data window is set to display the latest lines of the image buffer You must either scroll up or down depending on the data scroll direction setting to view the rest of the sonar image The navigational information is then processed The current plotter is automatically configured with the position information Thus the ship s track is centered on
296. represents the number of data bins with an intensity of 0 no acoustic return The right most histogram bar represents the number of data bins with an intensity of 255 maximum acoustic return In the 6 bit image histogram the left most histogram bar represents the number of data bins with an intensity of 0 no acoustic return The right most histogram bar represents the number of pixels with an intensity of 63 maximum acoustic return The histogram bars are scaled relative to the largest histogram bar However if one bar dominates the histogram plot the bar for this data bin intensity is clipped and the remaining histogram bars are scaled with a more appropriate scaling factor The color look up table operations are described in detail in Color Look Up Table 120 Reco 1 8 bit 6 bit Data Image LUT 8 bit Data to 6bitimage Sin 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 123 5 8 4 5 8 4 1 5 8 4 2 5 8 4 3 Filter Operations Overview There are a number of different types of filter operations available in the Sea Scan filter However each filter operation has essentially the same purpose which is to alter the sample image Altering the sample image may mean to either accentuate a specific characteristic such as vertical lines or remove noise from the image or some other operation Selecting a Filter Operation To select a specific filt
297. rial cable This communication between a single talker and multiple listeners is based on a block transmission Blocks or groups of NMEA 0183 sentences are transmitted over the serial cable Each sentence has a header that uniquely identifies the talker and the information contained in the sentence A fathometer that supports the NMEA 0183 protocol continuously transmits a valid NMEA 0183 sentence A serial cable connects the external fathometer ta ker to a serial port of the Sea Scan PC control computer listener The Sea Scan PC polls the incoming NMEA 0183 sentences looking for the current water depth information More specifically the Sea Scan PC looks for the water depth in three valid NMEA 0183 sentences DPT Depth the standard fathometer depth sentence This sentence contains two fields Water depth relative to the fathometer transducer and Offset distance from the transducer to the water line Adding these two distances provides the total water depth in meters DBS Depth Below Surface water depth referenced to the surface This sentence contains the water depth in feet meters and fathoms The use of the DPT sentence is recommended in place of this sentence RAY Proprietary Raytheon depth sentence This sentence contains the depth in either feet or meters 6 2 2 1 1 Proprietary Serial Sentences NMEA 0183 DPT Altitude The Sea Scan PC application recognizes a special situation for recording both the water depth and altitu
298. rizontal information is displayed since the data has twice the axial resolution than what is displayed in the data window However the transverse vertical lines are doubled to maintain the proper 1 1 aspect ratio for the image 4 8 3 Zoom Window 4 8 3 1 Overview A zoom window is used to display the selected section of the sonar image The window also enables you to do the following perform multiple level zooms select a new section remap the color lookup table and measure the length of a feature in the selected section The zoom window consists of two sections the zoom tool bar along the left side and the zoom display section that displays the zoomed image 4 8 3 2 Zoom Toolbar Sea Scan PC Zoom Figure 4 21 Zoom Window The zoom tool bar allows you to perform various actions with the image that is displayed in the zoom window 4 8 3 3 Zoom Again Button Press the Zoom Again button to repeat the zoom selection process again Upon pressing the button the zoom window will be removed and the zoom selection process is initiated As described earlier the cursor will change to the zoom selection cursor You may now select a new section of the sonar image to display in the zoom window 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 60 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 8 3 4 Zoom in by Position Button El Press the Zoom In by Position button to zoom in a specific sectio
299. rollable gain compensation The Sea Scan gain control allows you to set the time gain compensation for the incoming sonar signal The Sea Scan gain control is always available and may be displayed at anytime It floats on top of the data window containing the new incoming sonar data Details of the Sea Scan gain control are provided in the following chapters Although each feature is described in detail in the following chapters the easiest method to learn the 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 20 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Sea Scan PC application is to try it We recommend you try Sea Scan PC in Training mode to become familiar with its basic operation and to help learn the many powerful features of the Sea Scan PC program 4 2 Screen Layout 4 2 1 Overview The Sea Scan PC screen may be divided into functional sections the caption bar the menu bar the Sea Scan tool bar the information window and finally the data window ea The caption bar along the top of the screen displays GWER 32 _ the Sea Scan PC title and the current operation 150 mode of the program menu bar is directly below the caption bar The menu items are described in detail in subsequent chapters The Sea Scan tool bar along the left side of the screen consists of a set of controls that allow you to instantly and easily change any of the operating and display settin
300. ross You can delete a single marker waypoint the entire set of marker waypoints or a selected group of marker waypoints The following instructions apply to both markers and waypoints 1 Select the Marker Delete button in the plotter tool bar to delete DCE markers The cursor will change to the marker delete cursor and Delete markers will appear in the status window Delete waypoints Delete markers 2 To delete a single marker move the cursor close to the marker you want to erase Then press and release the left mouse button The marker closest to the cursor is erased This action may not be undone If there are many markers close together you may want to zoom in on the group in order to select the correct marker without any problems To delete a selected group of markers move the cursor to one corner of the group Press the left mouse button and keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the mouse to the opposite corner of the group A black box will be drawn indicating the selected group as you move the mouse Upon releasing the left mouse button all markers within the black selection box will be erased To delete all of the markers hold down the Control key when you press the left mouse button This action may not be undone 3 The new number of markers and waypoints is displayed in the status window the status window is cleared of the Delete markers message and you are returned to the Sea Scan p
301. row button in the Scaling section For example the scale will be decreased from 50 to 20 gammas when the down arrow button is pressed once Current Geomagnetic Field Reading The current geomagnetic field reading is displayed in gammas in the center of the Scaling section Geomagnetic Field Data Display The Data Display section displays the geomagnetic field data Depending on the screen resolution the number of vertical pixels may vary Similar to the sonar image data display not all of the lines in the strip chart can be displayed on the screen at the same time However synchronized with the sonar image data display you may view the entire strip chart by scrolling up or down with the vertical scroll bar The dark centerline in the data display section indicates the current ambient geomagnetic field value The current geomagnetic field reading is plotted relative to the ambient geomagnetic field The 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 150 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 6 3 3 5 6 3 3 6 ambient geomagnetic field is set in the Magnetometer Settings dialog However it is also possible for the operator to reset the ambient geomagnetic field based on the last ten magnetic field readings Using the left mouse button click once on the current geomagnetic field reading in the Scaling section to reset the ambient geomagnetic field The geomagnetic readings in the strip chart will be replotted based on th
302. rs and provides a scale reference when the image data is stored as a GIF Select the Save As AutoGIF button to save the current zoom image as a GIF in the AutoGIF storage directory Furthermore an entry is generated in the log file gifinfo txt which contains reference information for all of the generated GIF images A comments section has been added to the zoom window The time date location and comment fields are added to the log file entry for the automatically generated GIF file See refer to AutoGIF Information Log File 178 for more information on the AutoGIF information file The white arrows along the left right and bottom edges of the zoom image indicate the location that is listed in the Location edit box To change the indicated location move the cursor to the desired location and press the left mouse button The time date and location information will be updated accordingly Cancel Select the Cancel button to remove the zoom window quickly The Cancel button has been added so the operator can quickly close the zoom window during the AutoGIF operation without having to toggle the Zoom button in the Sea Scan tool bar Area You can measure the area of a feature in the zoom window Please refer to 5 10 Area Measurement p 5 30 for more information about the area measurement process 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 120 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 7 5 5 8 5 8 1 5 8
303. s star The actual sonar data background is within the tolerance of the target background strength X cross The actual sonar data background is outside the tolerance of the target background strength The bin is considered to be invalid MAX There have been a maximum number of consecutive invalid readings for this bin The number of consecutive invalid adjustments is listed after the MAX message AUTO The gain has been set automatically even though the resulting background strength is outside the allowed tolerance level This override has occurred because the automatic gain process was unable to set the gain for the designated bin within the acceptable tolerance 4 10 Layback 4 10 1 Overview Layback refers to the surface distance between the position of the survey vessel as indicated by the external navigation device and the actual position of the towfish The external navigation device typically indicates the precise position of the survey vessel or more accurately the device antenna and not the towfish Since the sonar data represents data with respect to the towfish it is important when positioning targets in the sonar data to be able to accurately position the towfish first Knowing the exact position of the towfish is a difficult task The layback offset compensates some of the inherent errors in accurately positioning the towfish with respect to the position provided by the external navigation device ayback
304. s not stored in the main survey file However a reference to the sonar data file is entered which would allow a survey file reader to locate the sonar image data Side Scan Parameters The Channel and Range fields are required The side scan parameters allow you to determine the state of the sonar during the data collection process Fathometer Parameters If an external fathometer is available the incoming water depth may be logged in the main survey file The fathometer information is likely arriving asynchronously with the navigational information thus the most current water depth is recorded A separate fathometer archive file is created when the DPT fathometer survey file has is selected This separate survey file is a continuous log of all the fathometer information from the external fathometer device See Fathometer Survey 173 for more information about the fathometer survey file Magnetometer Parameters If an external magnetometer is available the incoming magnetic field readings may be logged in the survey file The magnetometer information is arriving asynchronously and at a much faster rate than the navigational information thus only the most current magnetic field reading is recorded The minimum and maximum readings in the interval since the last survey file record are also recorded The minimum and maximum readings will indicate the level of activity in the time between survey file records A separate magnetomete
305. s of three Rng Bearing sections the Bearing and COG display the Range Bearing and Estimated Time En route ETE and the Marker Identification The current COG as determined by the external navigational source is displayed graphically as a ship pointing the direction within a compass rosette The ship is gray if true COG is used Otherwise it is dark blue if magnetic COG is in use for display purposes For the COG indicator Gennes north is up This is the same representation of the COG used in the Turn 1 plotter information window However in this case the bearing to the 0 00 244N 0 00 256E range bearing marker is also indicated A thick red mark on the _ compass rosette marks the relative position of the range bearing Figure 4 14 marker This provides a visual cue of the relative heading and absolute Range Bearing Dialog bearing to the range bearing marker The pilot can easily determine the required direction to steer to get to the range bearing marker The bearing and COG are updated every time new information is available from the external navigational source The range from the vessel s current position as determined by the external navigational source to the range bearing marker is displayed in the current units below the COG indicator The range is updated every time new information is available from the external navigational source The estimated time en route ETE from the ve
306. s stored the data file version and the resolution and compression modes Figure 5 11 Data File Preview Dialog all displayed The beginning text of any annotations present in the sonar image condensed images of the image buffer and the survey plotter are also displayed The condensed image of the image buffer is displayed using the current display parameters This preview allows you to visually confirm the contents of the data file quickly At this point you may either cancel the operation open the current data file or preview another data file The selected data file is located in a directory in the computer file system All the Sea Scan PC data files in the directory are considered to be a data set The data files in the data set are organized in ascending alphabetical order You can preview any of the data files in the data set by cycling through the list using the Previous and Next buttons Click the Previous button to preview the previous data file in the data set Similarly click the Next button to preview the next data file in the data set The contents of the Data File Preview dialog are updated with the new data file s information Click the Open button to open the data file that is currently being previewed The Sea Scan PC Data File Preview dialog is removed and the data file is read into the Sea Scan PC Review program Click the Cancel button to simply return to the Sea Scan PC Review program 5 5 2 2 Toolbar Preview The
307. s the High Frequency button The selected button will appear pressed down and backlight by the color white 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 37 4 5 6 Speed Control 4 5 6 1 Overview The Sea Scan PC maintains a constant 1 1 aspect ratio for the sonar image This is possible by setting the ping rate based on the current range and the speed over ground SOG The spacing of each vertical line on the screen is equivalent to a known distance for each of the ranges The Sea Scan PC sets the transducers to ping at these interval distances so the resulting image has a 1 1 aspect ratio The time between each of these known distance intervals is dependent on the speed of the vessel over the ground The time interval is set based on the Sea Scan PC s apparent speed The apparent speed is the speed the Sea Scan PC thinks the vessel is traveling 4 5 6 2 Automatic Speed Control Using an accurate estimate of the vessel s SOG we can determine the time interval required between each ping event An externally supplied SOG is used to set the Sea Scan internal apparent speed automatically 4 5 6 3 Manual Speed Control When the SOG information is not available externally you may manually match the apparent speed to the vessel s actual speed over ground to maintain the constant 1 1 aspect ratio for the image If not already turned on press the Manual SOG check box in the Sea Sc
308. se HDG from HDT sentence to use Heading to point your swath display If you choose to use heading make sure that you have selected to receive the HDT sentence from your GPS or navigational input device and in fact that that device is sending that sentence out and is being received properly 6 4 3 2 1 Testing Communication Navigation Overview You may test the communications of the external navigation device by selecting the Navigation Test Communications menu item from the External menu This menu command displays a dialog that displays the serial port settings and checks the availability composition and integrity of the serial transmissions The dialog consists of a single Input section and the Log and OK Figure 6 15 Communications Test Navigation buttons To remove the dialog select the Dialog button or select the Navigation Test Communications menu item from the External menu again to return to normal operation Device and Serial Port Settings The external talker device and the input port settings are displayed in the caption of the Input section The Sea Scan PC can identify most types of talker devices Any unknown talker device will be identified by its NMEA 0183 talker mnemonic Input The Input section displays the input sentences that were available in the latest block transmission from 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 156 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5
309. seful for debugging difficulties with external devices Magnetometer Strip Chart Window The magnetometer strip chart window displays the geomagnetic Eso 500 2 readings The magnetometer strip chart is displayed automatically when one of the magnetometer input devices is selected window is N located to the right of the sonar data window and is positioned so the N vertical location of the geomagnetic reading matches the vertical location of the matching sonar image data on the screen The Sea Scan PC synchronizes the display of the sonar image data and the geomagnetic readings based on time The magnetometer strip chart window consists of two sections Scaling section and the Data section Scaling The magnetometer readings are displayed at two separate scales red and blue The Scaling section displays the unit values in gammas for the two scales The red scale is displayed to the left and the blue scale Figure 6 12 is displayed to the right in the Scaling section By convention the red 4 Strip scale is always less than the blue scale In the Data Display section a gray vertical line indicates each scale unit Increment the red and blue scales by pressing the corresponding up arrow button in the Scaling section For example the scale will be increased from 50 to 100 gammas when the up arrow button is pressed once Decrement the red and blue scales by pressing the corresponding down ar
310. sformation Sea Scan PC Review allows you to view one data file at a time Whenever a new data file is opened the preview plotter and data windows are updated with contents from the new data file There are three methods for opening a data file You can preview the data file using either the Sea Scan PC Data File Preview dialog or the Tool bar preview In either case you have the option of opening the file after having previewed the contents of the file Alternatively you may open a data file directly without previewing the contents 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 110 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 5 5 2 Preview Data File 5 5 2 1 Data File Preview Dialog Select the Preview Data File menu item in the File Seoni PE Data File Frovin menu to preview the contents of a data file This is a K quick method to view the contents of a data file without having to actually load the data file into the Sea Scan Version Release 1 Open Review program You will be prompted by the Select SSPC Data File for PREVIEW dialog to select Sea Scan PC data file for preview Upon selection of a valid Sea Scan PC data file the Sea Scan PC Data File Preview dialog is displayed The Feta dialog displays a summary of the file information The filename the directory the data file is located the original date and time the data file wa
311. solution gain sliders Entering FALSE will use the normal gain slope model to calculate gain slider values Please use this with systems that are equipped with the necessary hardware 7 6 3 High Speed Ping Limit The High Speed Ping Limit entry is a Boolean TRUE or FALSE value A value of TRUE turns on the high speed ping limit only when the transducer frequency is 600 kHz or above A value of FALSE turns off the high speed ping limit The maximum low speed ping rate is 30 Hz and the maximum high speed ping rate is 70 Hz Please use this with systems that are equipped with the necessary hardware 7 6 4 Troubleshooting In order to facilitate trouble shooting the ISA PC104 sonar system card a sonar system card mode display was added to Sea Scan PC In order to enable this display add the Display Board Mode entry into the SSPC INI file under the Operating Mode section The Display Board Mode entry is a Boolean TRUE or FALSE value This feature should be used only to test the SSPC104 board ID and software compatibility with the hardware being used Entering TRUE will enable this feature Enabling this feature will cause the board ID and status of the hardware features to appear in the Sea Scan PC application s caption bar When the Display Board Mode feature is activated Sea Scan PC will display information about the PC104 board in the caption bar An example is pictured below amp Sea Scan PC v1 7 1 AUTO DIALOG Response Ping Limit Lo
312. sonar image data is displayed such as the data and zoom windows will change immediately to the inverted color scale When the current color scale is inverted the Invert Color Scale check box will appear pressed Similarly when the current color scale is not inverted the check box will appear raised Cycling Color Scales The color scales organized a list This list is displayed as a standard pull down list when you select the down arrow next to the color scale name There are left and right arrow buttons below the color scale name The left and right arrow buttons allow you to cycle through the color scale list Select the left arrow to change the color scale to the previous color scale in the list Similarly select the right arrow to change the color scale to the next color scale in the list The color scale in the information window and anywhere the sonar image data is displayed such as the data and zoom windows will change immediately to the newly selected color scale The name of the selected color scale will be displayed in the Sea Scan tool bar 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 31 4 4 2 5 Setting Custom Color Scale 1 Click the Edit Custom Color Scale button in the Sea Scan tool bar to edit the custom color scale This button is enabled when the custom scale is the currently selected color scale The Sea Scan PC Custom Color Scale dialog will appear All of the
313. ssel s current position to the range bearing marker is displayed in hh mm ss format below the range The ETE calculation is based on the current range and speed over ground The ETE is updated every time new range and SOG information is updated The range bearing marker is identified below the ETE The location and the identifier string are 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 47 displayed If the identifier string of the range bearing marker is changed using the Marker Waypoint Rename button the identifier string in the Rng Bearing dialog is updated as well 4 7 5 4 Track Survey The track survey option is an extension of the Rng Bearing dialog All the information available in the Rng Bearing dialog is also available in the Track Survey dialog with some notable enhancements A set of waypoints may be selected in sequence to guide you through a survey For each leg of the survey two waypoints are selected as the start and end points A line is drawn between the two waypoints and the end marker is used as a reference with which to steer to The cross track error XTE is displayed numerically and graphically You can set the XTE range and an arrival alarm radius When the vessel is within the arrival radius you are prompted to select another end waypoint The previous end waypoint is automatically updated to the new start waypoint for the next leg The Track Survey dialog floats on top of the Sea Scan plo
314. stance between conductors meaning each conductor is completely separate from all others very low resistance between one conductor any other conductor indicates a short e The resistance of a short should be similar to the end to end check A higher resistance between conductors but not infinite resistance may indicate saltwater intrusion or other cable damage e Ashort is most likely to occur between a data channel and it s return channel If the cable tested fine be sure to test the Pig Tail too 7 5 1 5 Troubleshooting Chart Cable Symptom Possible Cable Problem Towfish is connected but not transmitting Left cable channel broken or shorted or cable has salt water intrusion Towfish fuse fails Left cable channel shorted or cable has salt water intrusion No right channel data Right cable channel open or shorted Heavy right channel noise Leakage between right channel conductors No response when switching to high frequency Control channel open or shorted dual frequency only 7 6 Sea Scan PC System Board Configuration This section is primarily for Sea Scan PC users that have Sea Scan PC installed in an user less situation i e AUV If you have a towed system i e a towfish then this section is not for you Marine Sonic Technology through the years has come out with several versions of the ISA PC104 sonar system card Sea Scan PC up until version 1 7 0 required that a separate version of Sea
315. symbols may be toggled on and off The number of active annotations is displayed to the right of the Toggle Annotation Display check box Any changes to the annotations are added to the modification list in the File Information dialog The annotation feature is identical to its counterpart in the Sea Scan PC program Please refer to 4 14 Annotations p 4 60 for more detailed information At any time the currently opened data file may be resaved over the original data file saved to a new data file or saved as a TIFF We do not recommend saving over an original raw data file since all of the original data will be lost If you have made changes to the data file such as having filtered the entire sonar image we recommend you save the data under a new filename Thus the old original data will still be available 5 12 2 Data Storage Parameters The sonar data can be written to disk using a variety of channel resolution and compression modes The channel resolution mode dictates the amount of the raw data written to disk The compression mode dictates the level of compression the raw data undergoes when it is written to disk NOTE The use of compression is no longer recommended when saving the data files The Sea Scan PC application suite no longer supports the compression of mst data files Compressed data files are incompatible with most third party readers such as the MST to XTF and GeoTIFF converters For more information on s
316. t 2 Place the engine in neutral in order to disengage the propellers 3 If deploying the towfish off the stern and the bottom is reachable lower the towfish to the bottom and then lift it off the bottom about six feet Use the auto gain button in the gain window as soon as the towfish moves forward to initiate an auto gain operation If the bottom is not reachable lower the towfish to below the desired towing altitude The computer operator can monitor the towfish altitude by watching the bottom and surface reflections on the screen Use the reset button in the gain window to reset the gains If deploying the Towfish off the bow or over the side let out the necessary amount of cable and then begin your survey run As the survey vessel slowly accelerates to the towing speed the towfish will lift further up from the bottom This is caused by increased drag on the in water cable The interaction between cable drag amount of in water cable and tow speed will greatly affect the tow depth This topic and other Sea Operation issues are discussed in detail in Sound Underwater Images A Guide to the Generation and Interpretation of Side Scan Sonar Data by John P Fish and Arnold Carr Complete Sea Scan PC System The entire Sea Scan PC system is now ready for operation Refer to the following figure for a complete system diagram 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 14 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 3
317. t File As dialog will appear prompting you for a filename and path Upon selection of a valid filename and path the marker and waypoint data will be saved Please refer to Marker Waypoint Data File 168 for more information about the waypoint data file format Save Global Marker List On Exit If the global marker list has been modified you will be prompted to save the list as a mkr file when you shutdown the Sea Scan PC Review application A dialog is displayed that lists the number of markers that have been added and the number of marker Ids that have been changed You are asked Do you want to save the global marker list before you exit Select the Yes button to save the list A Save Waypoint File As dialog will appear prompting you for a filename and path for a new mkr marker file Alternatively select the No button to exit the application without saving the list Finally select the Cancel button to return to the application The option to save the global marker list on exit can be disabled in the user options See Setting User 10 for more information about the user options Read Marker File Markers and waypoints may be read from disk This feature allows you to display a set of waypoints that have been previously stored or typed into a properly formatted mkr marker file with a simple text editor Please refer to Marker Waypoint Data File 164 for more information about the waypoint data file format Select the Markers
318. t Remote Settings menu item in the External Host Remote Settings menu to set the Host Remote settings The Host Remote Host Remote Connection Vx Settings dialog is displayed The dialog consists of three ak ee Gasca sections the Host Remote Connection section the RCA RCA Sentence Interval sec X Sentence Interval section and the Communication Port section 5 10 20 Communication Port COM 4800 8 N 1 Default Figure 6 18 Host Remote Settings Dialog Host Remote Connection Enable the Host Remote feature by selecting the A low Remote Control radio button A mark will appear in the radio button when the option is enabled When the Host Remote feature is enabled the Sea Scan PC will broadcast the RCA sentence over the RS232 serial connection signaling that it is available for remote control Furthermore if the Sea Scan PC is not already set to respond automatically to dialog boxes this option is enabled automatically This option is essential for use in the Host Remote mode See Automatic Options Respond Automatically to Dialog 5 28 for more information about this option 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 160 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 6 6 2 3 RCA Sentence Interval The RCA Sentence Interval section dictates the interval time in seconds between the broadcasts of successive RCA sentences To select an interval place the cursor on the corresponding radio
319. t file from disk Although waypoints and markers have the same functional capabilities they may be treated completely separately The waypoint buttons in the plotter tool bar only affect the waypoints in the plotter Similarly the marker buttons in the plotter tool bar only affect the markers in the plotter 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 45 4 7 5 2 Selecting a Marker Waypoint The status window will display information about the 2 0000 048 0000 300E Waypoint most recently selected marker or waypoint This feature is useful for determining exact marker locations and quickly identifying different markers on the plotter To identify a marker or waypoint in the status window move the arrow cursor to a position in the display window close to the marker or waypoint you would like to select Then press and release the left mouse button The location and identifier string of the marker or waypoint closest to the cursor are written to the status window The most recent information remains in the status window until another marker is selected or another action that makes use of the status window is selected Alternatively the status window may be cleared at any time by clicking in the window 4 7 5 3 Range Bearing Any of the markers or waypoints may be selected as a navigational marker that is used as a steering reference The range bearing and estimated time en route from the vessel
320. t is made 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 79 4 13 4 13 1 4 13 2 4 13 2 1 4 13 2 2 Object Height Measurement Overview It is possible to measure the height of a feature from the sonar image 7 if there is discernible shadow behind the feature Defining the geometry of the towfish the object and the object s shadow allows the attitude operator to measure the height of an object The Sea Scan PC has automated this object height measurement process Height Shadow Figure 4 41 Object Height Calculation Orientation There is an excellent discussion concerning sonar record interpretation shadows and height measurement in Sound Underwater Images A Guide to the Generation and Interpretation of Side Scan Sonar Data by John P Fish and H Arnold Carr Factors Affecting Height Measurement Transducer Object and Object s Shadow Geometry The object must cast a visible acoustic shadow This may not occur in some situations such as if the object is too close to the transducer Furthermore the end of the shadow must be visible on the sonar record line The height calculation assumes an ideal geometry In other words the acoustic path from the transducer to the top of the object to the end of the shadow is straight and the seafloor is level The first assumption of a straight acoustic path is valid considering that conditions were one sees the acoustic path bend are not co
321. tained Sea Scan PC system to be included on autonomous vehicles and other underwater vehicles that can only be controlled remotely The Host accepts control commands from the Remote and transmits status information to the Remote The Remote computer must be capable of transmitting ASCII commands and receiving status information from the Host over the same RS232 serial line The communication protocol between the Host and Remote is outlined in the Sea Scan PC HOST REMOTE Serial Communications Protocol Reference Manual The communication interface is modeled after the NMEA 0183 communications protocol It provides for flexibility in command control and an adequate level of transmission error detection Furthermore the use of the proprietary sentence allowed in the NMEA 0183 communications protocol allows the Remote to piggyback the control command sentences with input from other external devices such as navigational input Sea Scan PC Software Overview In Host Remote mode the Host Sea Scan PC is completely controlled by the Remote computer Prior to initiating a Host Remote connection the Remote Sea Scan PC system must be prepared for autonomous use As outlined in the Sea Scan PC Host Remote Serial Communications Protocol Reference Manual the Remote must start up in a query state The Host broadcasts the RCA sentence over the RS232 serial connection signaling that it is available for remote control Host Remote Settings Select the Hos
322. termine offset from known Lat Long position Click on a feature in the sonar image selects a specific sonar data line Figure 4 20 Calculation of Lat Long for Nadir Marker If the COG is not available the orientation of the swath cannot be determined In this case Sea Scan PC has no way of knowing the L L of a feature that is offset from the source of the selected sonar record line Thus the position of the source is used to mark the selected feature This is known as a nadir position and is marked with a purple square The nadir is the point along the swath that is directly beneath the towfish The default identifier string consists of the name Nadir followed by the marker number for example Nadir0016 You may change this name at any time using the Rename Marker button in the plotter tool bar 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 58 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 8 4 8 1 4 8 2 No Marker If the L L position of the source for the sonar record line is not available the position of the selected feature cannot be marked In this case you are alerted with a message in the plotter status window that the Sea Scan PC was unable to determine a L L position for the selected feature Zoom Overview The Sea Scan PC allows you to zoom in on any section of the sonar image The selected section is displayed in a separate window that floats on top of the data window containing the new incomi
323. tes the mapping transformation from the 8 bit 0 255 sonar data to the 6 bit 0 63 image data The default color look up table is a straight ramp that maps the 8 bit intensity data to the 6 bit display data as a linear function The 6 bit display data is plotted as a function of the 8 bit sonar data Thus each value of the sonar data from 0 255 along the x axis has a 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 108 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 Look Up Table Buttons Select the Invert button to invert the color look up table The color look up table will be redrawn and the sonar LUT image data and 6 bit image histogram will be regenerated and displayed using the new transformation The Invert button will appear pressed down and it Image backlight with the color white Select the nvert button again to return the color look up table to the normal mode Select the Ramp button to reset the transformation to a straight ramp If the color look up table is currently inverted the transformation will be an inverted ramp Likewise if the color look up table is not inverted the transformation will be a non inverted straight ramp Select the Ramp button to reset the transformation to a straight ramp If the color look up table is currently inverted the transformation will be an inverted ramp Likewise if the color look up table is not inverted the transfor
324. that allows you to set User specific settings related to the Sea Scan PC Review operation Zoom Units Data Storage This command displays a dialog that enables you to set the data storage parameters The channel resolution and compression factor may be adjusted depending on the operating preference The data storage parameters are described in detail in Data Storage Parameters 131 User This command displays a dialog that enables you to set various user options The shutdown runtime and data modification alert options may be adjusted depending on the operating preference The user options are described in detail in User Parameters 104 Zoom This command displays a dialog that enables you to set various zoom options The default zoom size and default path for the automatic GIF storage directory may be set depending on the operating preference The zoom options are described in detail in Zoom 1181 Units This command displays a dialog that enables you to set the length speed and location units A consistent set of units is used throughout the application The units are described in detail in Units 34 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 101 Group Review This command allows you to perform automated group review operations on an entire data set from a survey The group review operations are described in detail in Group Review 132 Group Review Status This command toggl
325. the waypoint data file format 27 Select the Marker and Waypoint Read button in the plotter tool bar read the markers and waypoints from a waypoint data file You will be prompted by the Open Marker File dialog to select a valid waypoint data file Upon selection of a valid waypoint data file the Sea Scan plotter will attempt to read all of the markers and waypoints If for any reason the Sea Scan plotter cannot read all of the markers and waypoints you will be informed of the number of successful reads The new number of markers and waypoints is displayed in the status window The new markers and waypoints from the waypoint data file are displayed immediately although some may not be visible in the current plotter boundary coordinates To ensure that you can see all of the markers and waypoints select the Automatic Configuration button while holding down the Control key This will automatically center the track points as well as all the markers 4 7 6 Measure Distance using the cursor The range and bearing for the distance measurement are displayed in the status window The most recent information remains in the status window until another measurement is made or a marker is selected or another action that makes use of the status window is selected Alternatively the status window may be cleared at any time by clicking in the window You can measure distance as range and bearing between two points on the plotter 1 Select the Dist
326. the Filtered Sample Image the Filter Selection list the Filter Action buttons the Filter Sequence Recorder and finally the Color Look Up Table Record 1 6 bit Image Figure 5 20 Image Filter Windo Original Sample Image A condensed image 50 of the original sample image is always displayed This allows you to compare the results of a filter operation or a sequence of filter operations with the unfiltered original image at all times Filtered Sample Image The sample image is displayed at display resolution in the filter window Thus just like in the data window for every pixel in the image there are really two horizontal pixels The more intense of the two pixels is used in the sample image This Filtered Sample Image display shows the results of the selected filter operations Upon the completion of a filter operation the Filtered Sample Image section is updated with the resulting image This section always displays the current state of the filtered image so you can see the result of successive filter operations In other words for sequences of filters subsequent filter operations are always applied to the image resulting from the previous filter 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 122 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 operation and not the original image 5 8 3 4 Filter Selection The filter selection list allows yo
327. the check box meude Header En Tab delimited when the item is enabled Figure 4 51 Survey File Options Files This section lists the three possible survey files main fathometer and magnetometer To enable a specific survey file place the cursor on the corresponding check box then press and release the left mouse button A check mark will appear in the check box when the survey file is enabled The corresponding survey file will be created if the check box has been checked Timestamp The Sea Scan PC can include a number of different timestamps for each event in the survey file The System Time is a required field Each of these timestamps are described in detail in Navigational 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 92 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 and External Information Timestamp 177 Navigational Input The Position LL is a required field The Loran Time Delays are only relevant if you are using a Loran C positioning system Otherwise the Loran Time Delays option should not be selected Operations When this item is enabled the data storage information is inserted in the main survey file This information allows you to determine when and where a data file was saved Each data storage information section consists of a set of 4 lines The data file s pathname version and begin and end system times for the sonar data are recorded It should be noted that the sonar image data i
328. the cursor anywhere in the red bar and press the left mouse button When both channels are in use you can select the red bar for either channel 2 Keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the red bar to the desired range delay Then release the left mouse button When both channels are in use the range delay is adjusted for both channels simultaneously Both channels are always set to the same range delay As the red bar is moved the diagram as described below is continuously updated to reflect the new range delay setting Range Delay Mode The range delay mode does not affect the data collection or viewing process The range delay mode only affects the presentation of the swath coverage in the plotter and the calculation of markers along the length of the swath line The estimated swath coverage is displayed differently in the plotter depending on the range delay mode For water column removal in range delay equal to towfish 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 76 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 altitude mode the range delay is considered to be the towfish altitude In this situation the start of the estimated swath coverage for both channels is directly below the towfish Alternatively in swath offset mode the range delay simply offsets the active area of the swath In other words the range delay extends your view out to the side The start of the estimated swath coverage for both chan
329. the image However the image noise which is typically high frequency in nature is increased also in most cases Edge Enhancement These sets of filters enhance the line content the edges in the image The resulting image is drastically different from the original image since only the edges remain The greater the change in pixel intensity at the edge the more intense the edge will be displayed in the resulting image This is a useful set of filters to extract features from image data Shift and Difference Edge Enhancement The shift and difference edge technique is the simplest and fastest of the edge detection schemes available Horizontal vertical and diagonal lines are enhanced with these respective filter operations Matched Edge Enhancement The matched edge technique strongly emphasizes the horizontal and vertical edges in the respective filter operations Gradient Directional Edge Enhancement The gradient directional edge technique selectively emphasizes the edges in a specific direction Using north as up the filters enhance the edges found in the respective directions only Laplacian Edge Enhancement The Laplacian edge enhancement technique is an omnidirectional edge enhancement operation These filters will accentuate the edges in all directions and will delineate sharper edges than the other edge enhancement techniques listed above The Laplace 1 filter operation is an approximation of the Laplacian operator used in mathematics
330. the maximum intensity was detected These 256 levels of acoustic intensity are drawn to the screen with a 64 element color scale 6 bits In other words the data intensity values between 0 and 255 are converted to display intensity values of 0 to 63 These display intensity values from 0 to 63 are drawn to the screen by the color scale elements 0 to 63 respectively The current color scale is displayed in the information window Having the color scale displayed on the screen allows you to ensure the contrast and brightness of your monitor are set properly 4 4 2 2 Selecting the Color Scale The Sea Scan PC has a set of predetermined color scales The color scale you select can have a dramatic effect on your interpretation of the sonar image data since different color scales bring out different features in the sonar record We recommend you try various color scales for your sonar 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 30 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 4 2 3 4 4 2 4 record interpretation until you are comfortable with one particular color scale t There is also a user definable custom color scale With the custom color scale the operator can define any of the 64 colors To select a color scale select the corresponding item in the color Bronze scale pull down list in the Sea Scan tool bar The color scale in the information window and anywhere the sonar image data is displayed such as the dat
331. the sonar record line In other words a short vertical line represents a low intensity acoustic return Likewise a long vertical line represents a high intensity acoustic return The reflections from the seafloor and the object show up as long vertical lines high intensity returns The shadow is characterized by short or nonexistent vertical lines low intensity returns The A mode view provides a specific view of the selected line for more precise positioning the sliders for the height calculation Bottom Object and Shadow Sliders The three sliders allow you to define the geometry of the transducer the object and the object s shadow for each particular circumstance The Bottom slider the one closest to the source 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 81 4 13 3 6 4 13 3 7 4 13 4 4 13 4 1 transducer is placed at the bottom seafloor reflection The Object slider always in the middle is placed at the object that is creating the shadow The Shadow slider the one furthest from the source is placed at the end of the shadow The two views A mode and B mode should enable you to place the sliders in the proper locations on the sonar record line There are vertical lines attached to the sliders extending into both views to orient the sliders properly As the sliders are moved the geometry and height calculation view is continuously updated to reflect the new geometry Geometry and Height C
332. the status window and you are returned to the Sea Scan plotter Markers and waypoints are not cleared To erase markers and waypoints please refer to Marker and Waypoint Delete 51 5 6 5 Print a Select the Print button in the Sea Scan plotter tool bar to print the plotter information to the default printer You will be prompted by the Sea Scan PC Print Plotter dialog to select the print options You can chose to print any combination of the following items the file information at the top of each printed page the image of the current plotter the image of the survey Sea Scan PC Print Plotter plotter a list of the current markers and waypoints To select an Print Options item place the cursor in the corresponding check box then press and Print Eile information release the left mouse button A check mark will appear in the check box to indicate the item has been selected to be printed Likewise to Print Marker List unselect an item place the cursor in the corresponding check box then press and release the left mouse button again The check mark Figure 5 14 Print Plotter will now be removed from the check box to indicate that the item will Dialog not be printed Select the OK button or hit Return to print the selected items The selected items will be printed to the default printer Select the Cancel button to cancel the print process Print Current Plotter 5 6 6 Read Save Settings T
333. the time zone environment variable needs to be set The following sections will walk you through setting the time zone environment variable on Windows 98 Se Windows Me and Windows XP Windows 98 In order to set the time zone environment variable in Windows 98 1 Goto the Start Menu and click on run 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 182 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 7 4 2 2 Enter msconfig exe in the Open edit box 3 Click the OK button 4 This will bring up the System Configuration Utility 5 Click on the autoexec bat tab 6 Click the New button 7 Type set TZ zzz Jdfalfill where 222 is a required three character string with the name of the current time zone Jd a is a required field with an optionally signed number of one or two digits specifying the local time zone s difference from GMT in hours and is an optional three character field with the name of the local time zone during daylight saving time For example the following command sets the time zone to Pacific Time set TZ PST8PDT or for Greenwich Mean Time set TZ GMTO 8 Click OK 9 You may have to reboot the computer for the variable to take effect Windows Me The procedure is similar to Windows 98 However there is no autoexec bat file in Windows Me In order to set the time zone environment variable in Windows Me 1 Go to the Start Menu and click on Run 2 Enter msconfig exe in the O
334. the tow bar lifting the towfish up and away from out of te bottom debris the anchoring debris Itis very important that the Nuit e cr Safety Mechanism end loop of the safety mechanism cable is tow connected to the towfish shackle Otherwise the SA SE safety mechanism cable will not be connected and when the shear pin releases the load will be transferred directly to the towfish connector The resulting strain on the towfish connector will cause Figure 3 4 Safety Mechanism Operation to it to break Free Towfish from Anchoring Debris 3 3 4 5 Deploying Towfish There are many safety issues to consider when deploying the towfish The most typical and incidentally the most dangerous situation is deploying the towfish over the stern of your survey vessel 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sonar Operation 13 3 3 5 WARNING Do not lower the towfish off the stern while underway The propeller wash will cause very unpredictable towfish flying action and may suck the towfish under the vessel into the propellers Although it is generally safer deploying the towfish off the bow or over the side for shallow operations it is still good practice to exercise caution and commonsense We have found the following method the safest and easiest method of deploying the towfish 1 Stop the survey vessel It is not necessary to come to a complete stop but slow the vessel down to at least a slow coas
335. tion modes are expressed as 1000 x 512 1000 x 256 500 x 512 and 500 x 256 respectively 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 91 4 16 4 16 1 4 16 1 1 4 16 1 2 4 16 1 3 Archive Files Survey Files Overview Survey files are simple ASCII text files that contain a continuous log of selectable information from the external devices and possibly data storage activity In the main survey file each line is triggered by the incoming navigational information Information from the other external devices and the sonar parameters are included with each navigation event record By default the main survey file uses the svy extension In fathometer survey files each line is triggered by the incoming fathometer information By default the fathometer survey file uses the dpt extension In magnetometer survey files each line is triggered by the incoming magnetometer information By default the magnetometer survey file uses the mag extension The format of the survey files is described in detail in Survey File 17 Creating a Survey File The survey files are created automatically each time the Sea Scan PC application is started All of the subsequent sonar navigation fathometer and magnetometer information is written to the survey file The data storage information is also written to the main survey file As a result you will be able to completely recreate the survey based on the stored information in the
336. tional source If either the location or the heading is not available from the external navigational source the estimated swath coverage cannot be calculated and thus is not drawn on the plotter 4 7 4 2 Draw Lines SE Select the Draw Lines check box to draw the position fixes as connected points When selected the check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white Otherwise the check box will appear raised and the vessel s position fixes will appear as separate points 4 7 4 3 Draw Depth gt Select the Draw Depth check box to draw the estimated swath coverage and position fixes using a color scale related to the depth When selected the check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white Otherwise the check box will appear raised and the estimated swath coverage and position fixes will appear in default colors 4 7 4 4 Set Depth Color Scale Select the Depth Color Scale button to set the maximum depth extent for the depth color scale The depth is graphically represented at each position on the plotter by displaying the estimated swath coverage and position fixes with the color related to the depth The Depth Scale Settings dialog is displayed 1 Enter the maximum depth extent in the current units for the plotter depth display The depth color scale will be spread from the surface to this maximum depth extent Depth Scale Settings 2 Save the new maximum depth extent by clicking the OK b
337. to 1000 meters is selectable at specific ranges Most of the fine tuning of the gain adjustment is required at the closer ranges thus the selectable ranges are closer together at these closer ranges The selectable ranges are at 2 4 8 16 32 64 128 and 1000 meters The amount of gain at each selectable range for each channel may be adjusted independently However there is a maximum differential between two adjacent gain settings that will limit the relative movement of two neighboring gain controls In other words the gain between two adjacent selectable ranges cannot change too drastically Max Gain Min Gain Figure 4 27 Gain Slide The amount of gain at each selectable range is controlled with a gain slider control The control operates on much of the same principle as an equalizer for a stereo amplifier By lowering the red bar the level less gain is applied to the raw signal Likewise by raising the red bar more gain is applied to the raw signal There is approximately 80 dB of dynamic range in the gain adjustment from the minimum to maximum levels 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 65 To adjust the red bar level the amount of gain for an individual range interval 1 Place the cursor anywhere in the red bar and press the left mouse button When both channels are coupled you can select the gain control for either channel 2 Keeping the left mouse butt
338. to Active Mode You can switch back to active mode at any time by selecting the Mode menu item in the Options A pop up menu will appear Select the menu item Active from the Mode pop up menu The Sea Scan PC will be switched back to active mode The word TRAINING is removed from either side of the application name in the caption bar Any simulated data in the image buffer is cleared the simulated information from the external devices is cleared and the Sea Scan plotter is reset Both the current and survey plotters are reset to their previous settings None of the previous sonar data or external device information from before the Sea Scan PC was switched to training mode is available 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Section 5 e Sea Scan PC Review Sea Scan PC Review 97 5 Sea Scan PC Review 5 1 Overview This chapter describes the operation of the Sea Scan PC Review application Detailed subsections S Sea Scan PC outlining the various features of the Sea Scan PC Review v1 8 0 Review application follow a brief overview Many of Marine Sonic Technology Ltd the Sea Scan PC Review features are identical to Gloucester Virginia their counterparts in the Sea Scan PC program These features and controls will be briefly described and you are referred to the relevant chapter for the feature in the Sea Scan PC description However features specific to the Sea Scan PC Review program will be explai
339. top bits from the corresponding lists If two or more external devices share a communication port the port settings Bits per second Data bits Parity and Stop bits lists will be disabled You cannot change the port settings if multiple devices share the port You can only change the port settings if the selected Communication Port is currently available Display the External Input Output Status dialog to see the complete list of external devices and their respective communication ports 141 Communications Settings d Comm Port Bits per second 9600 M Data bits L Parity None Stop Bits kul Settings Dialog Common Equipment Connector Cable All external devices communicate with the Sea Scan PC via a serial cable that is connected to a serial port of the Sea Scan PC computer As a minimum a cable used for serial transmissions from an external device requires a signal line A and the shield Refer to the user s manual for your external device and wire the serial cable appropriately 1 For a DB 9 serial connector connect the signal line A to pin 2 For DB 25 serial connector connect the signal line to pin 3 For a DB 9 serial connector connect the external device signal ground to pin 5 For a DB 25 serial connector connect the external device signal ground to pin 7 If the serial cable has a shield or a drain wire this should be
340. tor north is up 4 7 2 3 Plotter Status Window The plotter status window primarily displays information 2 00 00 048N 00 00 300E Waypoint about the markers and waypoints The number of markers and waypoints in the plotter is always displayed on the left side of the status window Typically the status window will display information about the most recently selected marker or waypoint This feature is useful for determining exact marker locations and quickly identifying different markers on the plotter To display information about a marker or waypoint in the status window move the arrow cursor to a position in the display window close to the marker or waypoint you would like to select Then press and release the left mouse button The location and identifier string of the marker or waypoint closest to the cursor are written to the Status window The status window is also used to display plotter action information In Pan situations where you must perform an action after selecting a button from the plotter tool bar the required action is indicated in the status window For example upon selecting the Pan button in the plotter tool bar the word is written in the status window until you have selected a new center position in the display window You can measure distance as range and bearing between two points on the plotter This process is described later in this chapter The range and bearing for the distance measureme
341. tor may use the Sea Scan PC to image the feature at a higher resolution 1 Set the Sea Scan PC swath range to a shorter setting The smaller the range the better the axial and transverse resolution The feature will appear larger and with greater resolution with a shorter range The Sea Scan PC is capable of very high resolution imaging with the 300 and 600 kHz towfish set at the 100 50 and if possible 20 meter swath widths 2 Make acloser pass of the feature The towfish should not pass directly over the feature on the seafloor but to one side of the feature instead The operator should guide the ship s pilot so the feature will appear on either the left or right side of the sonar record 3 Save the high resolution image of the seafloor feature To save the data select either the Save As or the Save command from the File menu Please refer to Saving Datal 5 for more details about saving the sonar data to disk Safety The Sea Scan PC is a simple system to operate However the simplicity of operation does not diminish the danger of operation Any action that involves towing a body at the end of a cable at sea has an inherent danger involved Many of the problems that occur at sea can be averted with common sense good boat sense and experience Do not let the operation of the Sea Scan PC put your boat or your crew in a position of danger The books listed in 1 5 in the Appendix are written from years of field exper
342. trol s1 for more information about recording the transducer frequencies when the power is turned on Display status box when save data If this option is enabled the Data File Save dialog is displayed when the data is written to disk The Data File Save dialog displays the name and directory of the new data file the resolution and compression mode and it contains a thermometer that allows you to monitor the progress of the data storage process Condensed images of the image buffer and the current and survey plotters are also displayed for your reference See Saving Datal s5 for more information about the Data File Save dialog Set minimum pulse rate 1 pulse sec If this option is enabled the minimum pulse rate will be pegged at 1 pulse per second The Sea Scan PC will not be able to ping slower than this minimum limit This option will ensure that data is still being collected even as the speed over ground approaches zero knots 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 29 Force 3 pulses meter at 100m range NOAA has a requirement that side scan surveys at the 100 meter range must maintain a minimum of 3 pulses per meter 0 33m per pulse The correct pulse rate at the 100 meter range to maintain the proper 1 1 aspect ratio in the data window is 2 56 pulses per meter 0 39 per pulse The mandated coverage results in a pulse rate that is slightly faster and will cause the seafloor to be ov
343. tter When selected the check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white 4 7 5 Markers and Waypoints 4 7 5 1 Overview Markers and waypoints may be placed on the plotter to mark a location Markers and waypoints are placed on both the current and survey plotters These indicators are useful to mark navigational positions waypoints for a survey route and identified sites markers There is one type of waypoint which is drawn as a green cross on the plotter There are two types of markers an estimated marker and a nadir marker The first marker type estimated marker which is drawn as a red square indicates an estimated position location along a swath The second marker type nadir marker which is drawn as a purple square indicates the vessel s location only The distinction between the two markers is related to the calculation used to determine their location The two marker types estimated and nadir are described in greater detail in Calculating Position for 5 A location and an identifier string designate each marker The identifier string may be modified at any time Waypoint Markers Waypoints may be added in three manners e graphically by indicating a location in the plotter with the cursor e numerically by setting a location e reading a waypoint file from disk Markers may be added in two manners e graphically by selecting a feature in the sonar image e reading a waypoin
344. tter and the data window It can be moved anywhere on the screen and remains visible even if the Sea Scan plotter is hidden Initiating First Leg in Survey 1 Select the Track Survey check box in the plotter tool bar The cursor will change to the track survey selection cursor and the message Select Start marker will appear in the status window 2 Place the cursor close to the desired start waypoint then press and release the left mouse button 3 The closest marker or waypoint is selected as the start waypoint A dark blue box is drawn around the selected waypoint If there are 6 many markers waypoints close together you may want to zoom Select Start marker i in on the group in order to select the correct marker or waypoint without any problems The message Select End marker will now Select End marker appear in the status window 4 Place the cursor close to the desired end waypoint then press and release the left mouse button 5 The closest marker or waypoint is selected as the end waypoint A dark blue box is drawn around the selected waypoint and a dotted line is drawn between the start and end waypoints This line designates the route for the selected leg of the survey The Track Survey dialog is displayed the status window is cleared of the Select End marker message and you are returned to the Sea Scan plotter The Track Survey check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white indicati
345. ttings and checks the availability composition and integrity of the serial transmissions The dialog consists of a Communion Lon Fe single Input section and the Log and OK buttons To remove the dialog select the OK button or select the Output Test Communications menu item from the External menu again to return to normal operation Figure 6 21 Serial Communications Test Output Dialog Serial Port Settings The serial port settings are displayed in the caption of the Output section Output The Output section displays a scrolling list of the output sentences that have been sent to the external output device 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 163 Log Select the Log button to record the outgoing serial transmissions to the external device for debugging and analysis in a communications log file You will be prompted by the Select Communications Log File dialog to set a filename preferably with the c f extension and a destination directory for the communications log file Upon selection of a valid filename and location the Sea Scan PC will place some header information in the file and then all subsequent incoming transmissions from the external device The raw information will be logged until you close the Serial Communications Test dialog and return to normal operations This communications log file is very useful for debugging difficulties with external devices 6 8 Re
346. tton then press and release the left mouse button The selected radio button will now appear marked and the previously selected radio button will be cleared Only one radio button may be selected at any time In Off mode the Sea Scan PC will not add any event markers The Sea Scan PC will not process any incoming transmissions from an external event trigger device In other words even if the external device transmits an event trigger sentence the sentence contents will not be processed unless the event marker mode is set to External Trigger Event Marker Settings Mode 5 Automatic External Trigger Automatic Event Interval 50m 100 2088 Automatically Include Position Time Date Communication Figure 6 17 Event Marker Settings Dialog 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 158 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 6 5 3 3 In Automatic mode the Sea Scan PC will add event markers to the sonar image automatically Event markers are placed in the sonar image at prescribed distance intervals In External Trigger mode an external device may be used to trigger the placement of an event marker in the sonar image Upon receiving the trigger signal the Sea Scan PC places an event marker at the current sonar data line Automatic Event Interval The Automatic Event Interval allows you to set the distance at which an event marker
347. u to select a predefined filter operation The selected filter operation is always applied to the image that is displayed in the Filter Sample Image section There are many different groups of filters that when applied to the sample image provide very different results Each of the filters is described in detail later in this chapter 5 8 3 5 Filter Actions The Reset and Undo buttons allow you to perform these Reset JR Undo often used filter actions quickly and easily The Reselect button allows you to select a new sample image from the sonar image Finally the Apply Filter Sequence button allows you to apply the recorded filter sequence to the entire sonar image 5 8 3 6 Filter Sequence Recorder You can record a sequence of filter operations used on the sample image and then apply this sequence to the entire sonar image This section controls the recording of the filter sequence 5 8 3 6 1 Color Look Up Table This section displays two histograms the color look up table and look up table action buttons The 8 bit data histogram indicates the intensities of the data bins in the original sample image The 6 bit image histogram indicates the intensities of the pixels in the filtered sample image The relative height of each histogram bar represents the number of data bins or pixels in the source images with the intensity related to the histogram bar position In the 8 bit data histogram the left most histogram bar
348. und 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 109 3 Keeping the left mouse button pressed down move the cursor to the upper thresholding limit The histogram bars are continuously updated such that the intensity values in the selected thresholding limits are drawn in white on a dark gray background 4 Release the left mouse button to select the upper thresholding limit abit Data Image LUT 8 bit Data to 6 bit Image 5 5 Opening a Data File 5 5 1 Overview Once a set of thresholding limits have been selected the color look up table is remapped The color look up table is modified to indicate the current thresholding limits The 6 bit image display data is then remapped using the new color look up table and redisplayed All pixels with an intensity value less than the lower thresholding limit are remapped to an intensity of O minimum pixel intensity All pixels with an intensity value greater than the upper thresholding limit are remapped to an intensity of 63 maximum pixel intensity All pixels with an intensity value within the thresholding limits are remapped such that the range of intensities within the thresholding limits are stretched to fill the entire range of possible intensity values The 6 bit Image Histogram is recalculated to indicate the proper distribution for the new display image that has undergone the new color look up table tran
349. up or down to view sections that have scrolled past the currently visible portion You cannot scroll beyond the top or bottom of the image buffer Data is still collected and written to the image buffer If the data window has been scrolled the new data will not be visible until the data has scrolled up to the visible portion of the data window When a sonar line scrolls past the end of the image buffer it has disappeared unless of course the data has been saved to disk 4 4 4 2 Home State Home state indicates that the newest sonar line is immediately visible on the screen When you scroll the newest sonar line is no longer immediately visible on the screen The data window is no longer in the Home state The Home button in the Sea Scan tool bar will flash to indicate that the data window is not in the Home state Once you have scrolled back to the Home state the Home button in the Sea Scan tool bar no longer flashes The quickest method to return the data window to the Home state such that the newest sonar line is immediately visible on the screen is by pressing the Home button in the Sea Scan tool bar 4 4 4 3 Scroll Bar The vertical scroll bar for the data window consists of three components The up and down arrows are at the top and bottom of the scroll bar The scroll thumb in the middle indicates the position of the current visible portion of the data window relative to the top and bottom of the
350. ur survey Tow the fish in straight lines called lanes Survey Pattern To ensure complete swath coverage it is recommended to overlap successive lanes in a search area If NMEA 0183 navigational information is available the operator may monitor the ship s track and the estimated swath coverage during a search operation Survey lanes may be marked on the plotter with waypoints The survey ship may navigate from the plotter with these waypoints using the track survey feature Range Overlap Search Methodology Search Methodology Overview A standard search involves several stages from pre cruise planning to site feature identification This manual assumes that the operator has defined a search area planned search lanes set up and deployed the towfish We recommend the following scenario Site Feature Location The initial stage of the search involves finding a site feature location The operator may already have a marked latitude and longitude L L position In this case it should be a simple matter to locate the site Otherwise the search area should be methodically scanned in straight predetermined search lanes As shown in figure 3 6 under Starting the Operation 15 in this section to ensure complete swath coverage it is recommended to overlap successive lanes in a search area 1 Set the Sea Scan PC range to a wide setting Keep in mind that the 600 kHz towfish has a limited range of approximately 75 m
351. ut fuse Replace the fuse if blown and repeat the above test Test 3 Fuse Tests 1 Remove suspect fuse and hold between brass contacts on side of tester Use the outside buttons for long fuses and the inside buttons for shorter fuses The metal ends of the fuse must be in contact with both buttons 2 Press the test button If the fuse is good the Green LED will be energized If the fuse is blown the Green LED will not be energized Testing Directions End to End Testing Test each individual cable conductor from one end of the cable to the other to check for broken conductors e The cable should have a resistance of around 8 2 Ohms per 100 meters 2 5 Ohms per 100 feet for the data channels and 2 1 Ohms per 100 meters 0 64 Ohms per 100 feet for the return channels e Earlier generation cables may have a slightly different resistance due to different cable type but the data channels will still have higher resistance per meter than the return channels e Pigtails will have a very low resistance due to their short length e A break will have infinite resistance from end to end or possibly a very high resistance Conductor to Conductor Testing e This test can be done from either end if the cable passes the end to end test Test each conductor to each of the other conductors to check for cable shorts or leakage 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Appendices 187 A perfect cable will have infinite resi
352. ute definition of a good side scan sonar image However in general terms a good image simply enables you to see what you need to see The Sea Scan filter allows you to see the raw image differently You may initially process a small sample section 256 x 256 pixels of the sonar image You can experiment with the various filters on the small sample image first The filter sequence used on the sample image may be recorded and then applied to the entire sonar image The complete Sea Scan filter features are detailed later in this chapter The sample image is displayed in the same manner in the filter window as the sonar image is displayed in the data window Recall that there is twice as much horizontal information than can be displayed on the screen in the normal viewing mode Thus for every pixel on the screen there are really two pixels in the raw sonar image and the most intense of the two pixels is drawn on the display This preserves a proper aspect ratio of 1 1 for the sonar image while allowing twice the axial resolution The filters in the filter window process the full resolution image and not just the display resolution image Selecting a Sample Image You may begin the filter process on any section of the sonar image You may be required to scroll the sonar image to make the desired section visible 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Review 121 5 8 3 5 8 3 1 5 8 3 2 5 8 3 3
353. utoGain Status dialog is described in detail in Monitoring AutoGain 70 Survey File This command displays a dialog that displays the current status of the survey files The Survey File Status dialog is described in detail in Monitoring Survey File 93 v Off 10m 20m 50m 100 m Show All External Devices Data Storage AutoGain Survey File 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 23 Settings Data Storage Express Save This command displays a pop up menu that allows you to set specific settings related to the Sea Scan PC operation AutoGain Survey File User Display Units Data Storage This command displays a dialog that enables you to set the data storage parameters The automatic save settings and channel storage resolution may be adjusted depending on the operating preference The data storage parameters are described in detail in Data Storage Settings Express Save This command displays a dialog that enables you to override the automatic express save name and directory The express save parameters are described in detail in Setting Express Save Settings Ea AutoGain This command displays a dialog that enables you to set the automatic gain parameters The AutoGain interval and background signal strength may be adjusted depending on the operating preference The AutoGain parameters are described
354. utton If the value is invalid you will be alerted and you will remain in the Depth Scale Settings dialog You will not be able to exit by clicking the OK button unless the entry is valid If the entry is valid the depth scale is adjusted to the new maximum depth and the estimated swath coverage is redrawn on the Sea Scan Maximum piaite Figure 4 13 Depth Scale Cancel the new maximum depth extent by clicking the Cancel Settings Dialog button The depth scale is not adjusted and you are returned to the Sea Scan plotter 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 44 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 4 7 4 5 Draw Shoreline Select the Draw Shoreline check box to draw the shoreline on the plotter When a selected the check box will appear pressed down and backlight with the color white The shoreline is generated from the World Vector Shoreline data file wvsfull dat provided by the National Geophysical Data Center of NOAA WYvsfull dat is a digital data file containing the worldwide shoreline at a nominal scale of 1 200000 The wvstull dat data file must be present in the same directory as the Sea Scan executable for this option to be available If the Sea Scan PC application is unable to locate the wvsfull dat data file the Draw Shoreline check box is disabled and grayed out 4 7 4 6 Draw Grid Select the Draw Grid check box to draw the latitude and longitude grid lines on the EE plo
355. ve Setting Options menu to set the express save settings The Setfename automatically Express Save Settings dialog is displayed This dialog Er allows you to override the automatic express save E settings To enter a custom file name you must uncheck the Set Figure 4 47 Express Save Settings Filename Automatically check box When the box is not Dialog checked the Name entry box will be enabled not grayed out and you can enter valid default name The default name must not be more than 5 characters and must form a valid filename when appended with a three digit number and the mst extension To have Sea Scan PC automatically choose a name for your files simply check the Set Filename Automatically check box To enter a custom data path you must uncheck the Set Data Path Automatically check box When the box is not checked the Data Path below it will be enabled not grayed out When the Data Path is enabled you may now enter a valid default directory The new directory must already exist You will be notified if either of the entries is invalid Select the Browse button to browse the computer s file system for a new default directory and default filename os The Select Express Directory and Name dialog will appear Navigate through the computer s system to select a default directory Enter a 5 character name in the File name field to set the default filename Any Sele filename
356. ve corners A grid covers the plotter The grid is set to real world grid lines that line up at significant latitude and longitude values A maximum of five grid lines are drawn in either direction Changing the plotter coordinate boundary will change the location and maybe the number of grid lines on the plotter However the grid lines will always be in the proper locations and drawn with representative colors The equator 0 N North Pole 90 N South Pole 90 S International Date Line 180 E and the Prime Meridian 0 E are drawn in yellow All other degree grid lines are drawn in red minute grid lines in green and decimal minutes including tenths of minutes in blue This allows a grid of any dimension to be easily represented without having to draw too many lines 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 39 The distance between grid lines is displayed in the upper left corner of the display window The distance for this grid line spacing is marked along the upper left edge of the display window 4 7 2 2 Plotter Information Window The plotter information window displays the current location L L or UTM speed over ground SOG and course over ground COG These are the same values as those displayed in the information window above the data window However the COG is displayed graphically as a ship pointing the direction within a compass rosette instead of numerically For the COG indica
357. verview A number of different external devices may be connected to the Sea Scan PC These external devices provide additional information for the sonar operation such as a GPS receiver that provides navigational information You do not require a separate serial port for each external device The output from multiple devices may be read via the same serial port of the Sea Scan PC computer 6 1 1 Monitoring External Devices A number of different external devices may be connected to the Sea Scan PC These external devices provide additional information for the sonar operation such as a GPS receiver that provides navigational information You do not require a separate serial port for each external device The output from multiple devices may be read via the same serial port of the Sea Scan PC computer 6 1 1 1 Display External Input Output Status Dialog Display the External Input Output Status dialog by selecting the Essai Es Status Boxes External Devices menu item from the Options nn Le DET On menu This menu command toggles the display of the External Navigation 9600 8 N 1 Input Output Status dialog The dialog may be moved Event Marker COMA 9600 762 Of anywhere on the screen When the dialog is removed its position is remembered for the next time it is displayed The uaa External Input Output Status dialog consists of two distinct Figure 6 1 External Input Output sections Communications Port Settings
358. w High Speed Gain Of In the above example you can see that Sea Scan PC displays the status of the High Speed Ping Limit the High Speed Gain and the High Resolution Gain features It also displays the ID of the ISA PC104 sonar system card This ID is retrieved from the sonar system card itself It helps identify the features that the sonar system card has Below is a table with Board ID s and their associated features Oo oo 3 Original ISA sonar system card 00000 ISA sonar system card Dual Frequency ISA sonar system card Dual Frequency PC104 sonar system card Please note that this board may have High Speed Ping Limit High Speed Gain and or High Resolution Gain For these sonar system cards manual configuration will be required for proper operation See below paragraphs for more information Dual Frequency High Resolution Gain High Speed Ping Limit 104 sonar system card Dual Frequency High Speed Gain High Resolution Gain High Speed Ping 16 ase Limit PC104 sonar system car 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Appendices 189 7 7 7 7 1 For those sonar system cards that were shipped with Sea Scan PC High Speed version 1 0 4 or below the card will report itself as a Board ID 2 card You will have to enable the High Speed Ping Limit and the High Speed Gain features in the SSPC INI file For those sonar system cards that were shipped with Sea Scan PC High Speed HS versi
359. within the target thresholds The minimum and maximum target bounds are expressed as a percentage of the entire signal strength Processing Parameters The Processing Parameters section dictates the amount of processing time the Auto Gain program uses on the host computer Setting the number of Pings Between Processing Cycles informs the computer about how often you would like the Auto Gain program to run Specifying 1 Pings Between Processing Cycles allows the Auto Gain program to operate every time Sea Scan PC collects 1 ping line of data Specifying 3 Pings Between Processing Cycles allows Sea Scan PC to collect 3 pings of data before allowing the Auto Gain program to operate through 1 cycle This has the effect of reducing the load on the host computer It is recommended to set the Pings Between Processing Cycles to 1 if you have a fast computer over 300 MHz and to 3 if you have slow computer If you find that Sea Scan PC still is not as responsive as you would like please feel free to increase the Pings Between Processing Cycles to 5 or more Monitoring Autogain Process You may monitor the automatic gain process by selecting the Status Boxes AutoGain menu item from the Options menu This Shutdown 22 43 57 menu command toggles the display of the AutoGain Status Interval 10 minutes dialog The dialog may be moved anywhere on the screen Target Mid When the dialog is removed its position is remembered for the next ti
360. wo dialogs is the addition of a Remove button in the Edit Annotation dialog 4 14 3 2 Display Edit Annotation Dialog E To edit an annotation double click on the annotation symbol in the sonar image The Edit Annotation dialog for the selected annotation is displayed Alternatively select the Edit Annotation button in the Sea Scan tool bar or select the Annotations Edit menu item from the Options menu to edit an existing annotation in the sonar image The cursor will change to the annotation cursor Place the cursor close to the desired annotation symbol then press and release the left mouse button Edit Annotation The Edit Annotation dialog is displayed The annotation comment of the selected annotation is displayed in the Ship 0 00 041N 0 00 003W Comment text section dialog is identical to the Add En 2 Annotation dialog except for the addition of the Remove button X Figure 4 44 Edit Annotation Dialog 4 14 4 Displaying Annotation Symbols j Select the Show Annotations check box to display the annotation symbols in the 0 sonar image The annotation symbols are overlaid on the sonar image indicating their location When selected the check box will appear pressed down Alternatively select the Annotations Show menu item from the Options menu When selected a check mark will appear to the left of the menu item To hide the annotation symbols either select the Show
361. y coordinates and you returned to the Sea Scan plotter 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd Sea Scan PC Software 41 4 7 3 2 4 7 3 3 Automatic Configuration Select the Automatic Configuration button in the plotter tool bar to configure the active plotter boundary coordinates automatically The track points are centered in newly calculated boundary coordinates Hold the Control key and select the Automatic Configuration button to center the track points and any markers and waypoints This process works in exactly the same as the normal automatic configuration process however all the markers and waypoints are included The newly calculated boundary coordinates automatically center the track points as well as all the markers Hold the Shift key and select the Automatic Configuration button to automatically synchronize the boundary coordinates of the current and survey plotters If the current plotter is displayed the boundary coordinates for the survey plotter are transferred to the current plotter Similarly if the survey plotter is displayed the boundary coordinates for the current plotter are transferred to the survey plotter Zoom In Select the Zoom button in the plotter tool bar to zoom in on any section of the active plotter There are two methods for selecting a section of the plotter You can either select a section with default magnification factor x2 or you can select a section with any dimensi
362. y of the serial transmissions The dialog consists of a single Input ome aes section and the Log and OK buttons To remove the Figure 6 11 Communications Test dialog select the OK button or select the Magnetometer Magnetometer Dialog Test Communications menu item from the External menu again to return to normal operation All Communication Input Port Settings The input port settings are displayed in the caption of the nput section Input The Input section displays the sentences received from the external source in a waterfall display This allows you to check the validity of the sentence contents without the Sea Scan PC having to attempt to interpret the contents 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd External Devices 149 6 3 3 4 Log Select the Log button to record the incoming transmissions from the external device for debugging and analysis in a communications log file You will be prompted by the Select Communications Log File dialog to set a filename preferably with the c f extension and a destination directory for the communications log file Upon selection of a valid filename and location the Sea Scan PC will place some header information in the file and then all subsequent incoming transmissions from the external device The raw information will be logged until you close the Serial Communications Test dialog and return to normal operations This communications log file is very u
363. y the computer tick count system time The data mode which indicates whether the Sea Scan PC was in training or active mode is also written The header then displays the list of timestamps that are recorded in the survey file The timestamps options set in the Survey File Options dialog are used for all the survey files including the fathometer survey file 7 1 5 2 2 Fathometer Depth Information Each subsequent line in the fathometer survey file contains a complete set of timestamp position and fathometer information Commas or tabs as selected by the operator in the Survey File Options dialog separate the information fields Each line is delimited at the end by the character Each line of information may consist of 2011 Marine Sonic Technology Ltd 174 Sea Scan PC Operator s Manual Version 1 8 5 System Timestamp Julian Date Time This required field contains the timestamp for the navigational information record The timestamp is the number of milliseconds elapsed since Windows was started This field contains the Julian date and time for the navigational information record Y2K compliant Date Time This field contains the year 200 compliant date and time for the Position Water Depth Towfish Altitude fathometer record These required fields contain the latitude and longitude L L of the survey vessel for the fathometer record The latitude and longitude are written in a standard format
364. y the water wave front spreading and scattering These are known physical effects of acoustic energy traveling through a lossy medium As a result the amount of energy available to reflect from an object reduces as the outgoing acoustic wave travels away from the source The reflection from a distant object is not as strong as that from a like object closer to the transducer source of the acoustic wave However for sonar record display and interpretation it is desirable to maintain a constant level for the background echo return intensity This is achieved by adding gain compensation to the raw echo returns to counterbalance the losses to the signal strength as the wave traveled through the water The amount of gain required to counterbalance the losses due to signal attenuation are strongly proportional to but not entirely dependent on range Since range may be thought of as time it takes a known time for a signal to return from any given range the time dependent gain compensation is known as the time gain compensation TGC Thus a target at a 150 meter range may be made to have the same echo strength as a like target at a 50 meter range Different seafloor conditions and target characteristics can result in vastly different attenuation levels at a given range As result you must always set the TGC for the current operating environment Using the gain controls in the gain window you are able to define the amount of gain applied to the
365. yed Although the navigational information provides a continuous recording of position information there are two separate distinct sections based on time The first section contains the navigational information that was collected during the same time period as the sonar record lines that were saved in the data file The other section contains the navigational information that was collected before the time period the sonar record lines in the data file were recorded The former sector may be thought of as the imaged section of the navigational information since the sonar imagery for that position information is available in the data file When displayed in the current plotter the estimated swath coverage for this imaged section of the navigational information is drawn in burgundy red The estimated swath coverage for the later section the pre imaged section is drawn in the dark gray The survey plotter displays the image of the survey plotter that was stored in the data file Unlike the Sea Scan PC plotter you cannot manipulate the boundary coordinates or the presentation of the fixed image in the survey plotter However you can still add and erase markers and waypoints from the fixed image in the survey plotter 5 6 3 Edit Target Identification Window The target identification edit feature allows you to edit the complete target identification information for estimated and nadir markers In the Sea Scan PC plotter you can o
366. you can chose to print any combination of the following items the file information at the top of each printed page the image of the current plotter the image of the survey plotter and a list of the current markers and waypoints To select an item place the cursor in the corresponding check box then press and release the left mouse button A check mark will appear in the check box to indicate the item has been selected to be printed Likewise to unselect an item place the cursor in the corresponding check box then press and release the left mouse button again The check mark will now be removed from the check box to indicate that the item will not be printed 5 14 2 4 Print Statistics The Print Statistics section displays the number of pages required to print the selected print image and the selected plotter options The number of pages is updated whenever any print options are modified The print image will use at least one page The current and survey plotters when both selected are always printed on the same page use another page The marker list uses one additional page 5 14 3 Print Preview Dialog Select the Preview button in the Print dialog to preview the print ans image The Sea Scan PC Print Preview dialog is displayed allowing you to preview how the default printer will print the selected print image If multiple pages are required all of the pages are displayed in the Print Preview dialog Press the Print button to print directly fro

Sea Scan PC Operator`s Manual V1.8.5

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents